s« HANDBOOK OF PALI
I CD
CO
PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS Sf NORQATE.
Clotli, gilt. Price 18«.
Buddha; His Life, His Doctrine, His Order. By
Dr. Hehjtaxn Oldexbeho, Professor at the University of
Berlin, Editor of the Yinaya Pitakam and the Dipavamsa in
Pali. Translated from the German by "William Hoey, M.A.,
D.Lrr., Member of the Royal Asiatic Society, Asiatic Society
of Bengal, etc., of Her Majesty's Civil Service.
8vo. cloth. Price 21«.
A Manual of Buddhism in its Modem Development ;
translated from Singhalese MSS. By R. Spence Hardy,
M.R.A.S., Author of "Eastern Monachism." Second Edition,
with a complete Index by Dr. 0. Ekankfubtee.
By the same Author. 8vo. cloth. Price 12».
Eastern Monachism ; an Account of the Origin, Laws,
Discipline, Sacred "Writings, Mysterious Rites, Religious Cere-
monies, and Present Circumstances of the Order of Mendicants
founded by Gotama Buddha (compiled from Singhalese MSS.
and other Original Sources of Information). "With Compara-
tive Notices of the Usages and Institutions of the "Western
Ascetics, and a Review of the Monastic System.
8vo. cloth. Price 10«. 6rf.
Ehys Davids' Buddhism ; Lectures on the Origin and
Growth of Religion, as illustrated by some points in the
History of Indian Buddhism. By T. \V. Rhys Davids, Esq.
Being the Hibbert Lectures 1881.
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London;
and 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS ^ NORQATE.
BOOKS IN PALI.
BUDDHIST SCRIPrrRES IN PALI.
In 5 vols. 8vo. Price 21« each vol.
The Vinaya Pitakam, one of the principal Buddhist
Holy Scriptures in the Pali Language. Edited by Dr. H.
Oldenbeeg. Vol. I. The Mahavagga, with an Introduction. —
Vol. II. The Cullavagga.— Vol. III. The Suttavibhanga, I.
(Parajika, Samghadisesa, Anyata, Nissaggiya). — Vol. IV. The
Suttavibhanga, II. End of Mahavibhanga, Bhikkhunlvi-
bhanga. — Vol. V. The Parivara. Published with the assist-
ance of the Royal Academy of Berlin, and of the Secretary of
India in Council.
8vo. cloth. Price 21«.
The Dipavamsa, an Ancient Buddhist Historical Ee-
cord in the Pali Language. Edited, with an English Transla-
tion, by Dr. H. Oldenberg.
The Dipavamsa is the most ancient historical work of the Ceylonese ; it con-
tains an account of the ecclesiastical history of the Buddhist Church, of the
conversion of the Ceylonese to the Buddhist faith, and of the ancient history
of Ceylon.
8vo. Price 21«.
The Milinda Pafiho. Being Dialogues between King
Milinda and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. The Pali Text
edited by V. Tbencknee, of Copenhagen.
*' A very interesting dialogue between Milinda and Nagasena." — Max Miilier
in Chips I.
" Next in order of interest should undoubtedly be named the * Milinda Fafiha ;
or. Questions of Menander.' "Whatever be the origin of this remarkable work,
there can be no doubt of its great antiauity, for it exhibits a familiarity with
Greek names and places, and records a religious discussion between the Buddhist
divine Nagasena and a * Yona ' king Milinda, who can be identified with cer-
tainty with the Bactrian king Menander." — Childera in FuH Dictionary.
Also Bvo. Price 4».
Pali Miscellany, by V. Trenckner. Part I. The Intro-
ductory Part of tiie Milinda Panho, an English Translation
and Notes.
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London ;
and 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
3^
.^
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR,
A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A GLOSSARY.
COMl'ILEU BY
0. FRANKFURTER, Ph.D.
WILLIAMS AND NORGATE,
14, HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON;
AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.
1883.
HERTFORD:
rUMTED BT 8TKPBBN AVSTI.t AMD BOMS.
TO THE EEVEEEND
RICHARD MORRIS, LL.D., M.A.,
TICE-PBESIDEKT OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIEir,
AS A TOKEir
OF FBIEKDSHIP AND KESPECT.
ERRATA
Page
line.
HKAD.
Page
line.
RKAD.
4
33
tanhd.
31
36
tr. najjo to 1. 35.
5
5
prthivi.
34
28, 29
mdtuyd, mdtubhi.
6
25 '
moha.
35
22
sakhdresu, sakhesu.
6
32
odariko, oddro.
35
33
attdnath.
8
31
mudho.
45
5
yam.
It
5
mrnala.
47
18
ekdrasa.
9
7
ekddasa.
48
27
adhiko.
17
4
qravaka.
52
6
kiyddi, tanddi.
17
16
qalmali.
60
17
kareyyum, kubbeyum
17
18
khalldto.
68
10
uccate.
19
18
nikkho.
68
14
ganhdti.
21
11
ganhdti.
68
21
daddallati.
21
21
tikhino.
68
33
bubhukkhatl.
28
11
dvikoromi.
74
8
dvi.
31
10
adau.
75
29
ddsiddsam.
89
27
bliikkhu.
105
29
nana.
90
17
satapadl.
108
28
ug^ranbatha.
94
29
pahiyissati.
108
31
rakkba.
95
7
Isanassa.
109
5
amantesi.
102
22
adinnadana.
no
22
katabban.
103
8
sabbadhi.
110
24,26
gilmini.
103
10
panudanam.
113
15.'
uetbani.
103
20
sa.
114
19
addasuih.
103
29
samekkhasi.
114
21
addakkliuiii.
104
2
yasassi so.
117
30
asayarnvasi.
104
3
namaso.
121
28?
paradaresii.
104
12,13
vandama.
121
29
vijauaina.
XXIV
ERRATA.
Page. line. BUD.
124 9 paligiintliito.
125 8 dakklUnti.
125 18? Kasibharadvajo.
132 12 sampajano.
143 20 upajjhayena.
144 11, etc. ussaho.
144 35 haritattaya.
Page. line.
146 7,8?
147 14
144 16
148 24
149 27
150 9
BKAU.
sammata.
sammata.
avippavasaih.
anumodama.
yacati.
dharayamlti.
1544 18
1544 30
159a 12
165a 2
anu'kathayati.
anu-parayati.
ussaho.
satta-nikdyo.
167a 9 add. panudanam ' removal.'
170* 29 bhikkhunl.
1735 34 valittaro.
176a 25 add. sata-padt (f) ' a centi-
pede.*
Pag'e 60. — The first person plural of the optative ends sometimes in ' a,'
e.g. viharemu, j'dnemu. This is an archaic form, occurring mostly io
verses.
CONTENTS.
Preface
Pali Bibliography
Pakt I
Alphabet
Pronunciation
Classification of Letters
Vowels .
Short Vowels
Long Vowels
Nasal Vowels
Interchange of Vowels
Consonants .
Phonetic Changes .
Compound Consonants
Sandhi .
Euphonic Changes
Declension .
Declension of Nouns
Comparison .
Declension of Pronouns
Numerals
Cardinals .
Ordinals .
The Verb .
Present System .
Modes of the Present
Perfect System .
Aorist and Imperfect
Future
Conditional
Participles, Infinitives
Indeclinables
Adverbs
Prepositions .
Compounds .
FAOB
. ix
. XT
Tense
Gerunds
Part II.
Saranagamanam (Khuddaka Nikaya)
1
1
2
2
3
5
7
7
7
8
II
21
24
25
29
41
42
47
47
49
61
53
58
60
61
66
67
69
70
70
73
74
PAOB
SamaneraPanham (Khuddaka Nikaya) 82
Dvatimsakuram ,, ,, 82
Paccavekkhana (Anguttara Nikaya) 82
Dasadhammasuttam ,, ,, 83
Mahamangalasuttam (Khuddaka
Nikaya) . . . . .84
Ratanasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) . 85
Karanlyamettasuttam „ „ 88
Khandhaparittam(AnguttaraNikaya) 89
Mettasuttam „ ,, 90
Mettanisamsam (Jataka) . .91
Moraparittam ,, . .92
Candaparittam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 92
Suriyaparittam ,, ,, .93
Dhajaggaparittam „ „ . 94
Mahakassappattherabojjhangam
(Samyutta Nikaya) . . 96
Girimanandasuttam (Samyutta
Nikaya) 97
Atilnatiyasuttam (Digha Nikaya) . 101
Dhammacakkappavattanasuttam
(Samyutta Nikaya) . . 109
Mahusamayasuttam (Dlgha Nikaya) 112
Alavakasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 118
Parabhavasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) 120
Vasalasuttam „ „ 122
KasibharadvajasuttaTn ,, ,, 126
Saccavibhangam (Majjhima Nikaya) 127
Arunavatisuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) 133
Devadahasuttam „ ,, 136
A Collection of Kammavacas . . 142
Part III.
Glossary 162
Tables of Alphabets : —
Sinhalese Alphabet.
Burmese Alphabet.
Kambodian Alphabet.
Comparative Table of Alphabets.
b
PREFACE.
The Handbook of Piili which I place before my readers
consists of three parts, an Elementary Grammar, a Chresto-
mathy, and a Glossary.
I have called the grammar an elementary one, because no
attempt has been made to distinguish the different periods
in the development of the language. To write a scientific
grammar of Pali, it would be necessary not only to have
recourse to the different so-called ancient Prakritic dialects,
but also to the modern Aryan languages of India, more
especially Mahrathl. I believe MahrathI to be, if not the
daughter of Pali, at least more closely allied to it than
any other of the Indian vernacular tongues ; and among
these I include also Sinhalese. In fact, a scientific Pali
grammar can, in my opinion, only be written as part of a
comparative grammar of the Aryan languages of India.
I have called this work a Handbook of Pali. This requires
some explanation. I am well aware that Professor Forch-
hammer, in his report of the Rangoon High School, 1879-
1880, has shewn conclusively, as did the late Professor
Childers before him, that Pali means only Sacred Texts.
Professor Forchhammer, quoting from Burmese books, says :
" The Tipitaka Pali was written by means of the Magadha-
bhasha ; " and again, " The Pali of the Tipitaka may be
preached by means of any language." He goes on to
remark that "a Pali grammar and a Pali dictionary must
X PREFACE.
appear to the Burmans as an incomprehensible misnomer,
or at best what to us would be a Bible dictionary or a
grammar of the New Testament." I believe the examples
are not very well chosen. In a grammar of the New Testa-
ment we expect to find the New Testament Greek. A
Bible dictionary would mean a cyclopaedia, in which one
can find information on any Bible subject.
I could have chosen "Handbook of Miigadhl" as a title
of the book; but this would imply more than is actually
given in the book. Under such a title one would expect
to find a grammar of the Miigadhese Inscriptions and of
the MagadhI of the drama. Moreover, in calling it a
Handbook of MagadhI, I should have committed myself to
a definite statement about the country in which the language
of the Buddhist Scriptures was spoken. Pali means for
European scholars the sacred language of the Buddhist
Scriptures, and as a matter of convenience this designation
ought to be kept until conclusive proofs are adduced
to shew in which part of India this Prakrit dialect was
spoken. "We have moreover the excellent authority of
Subhuti, who calls his Abhidhdnappadlpikd a Pali dictionary,
and his Ndmamdld a work on Pali grammar.
As a reading-book I have chosen the Paritta. The text
is based on a MS. in the British Museum (Or. 1092), written
in Sinhalese characters. Besides this I had several printed
Burmese copies, and one printed Sinhalese copy of the book.
They however vary in the selection they give. None
contains all the extracts given in the reading-book. Part
of the Paritta has, as is well known, been published by the
late Professor Childers, and by the late M. Grimblot, with
notes and translations by M. L^on Feer. Some of the
suttas which in the " Extraits du Paritta " are given as
PREFACE. xi
belonging to the Sutta Nipata occur also in the Samyutta
Nikaya. The two suttas of the Digha Nikiiya wore pub-
lished by the late M. Grimblot in the " Sept Suttas Palis."
I have consulted the MSS. of the individual Nikayas in
constituting the text. The translation of the Sutta Nipata
given by Professor FausboU in the "Sacred Books of the
East " was of great service to me in deciding on the merits
of the various readings. I have not seen the " Ceylon
Friend," in which the late Rev. D. Gogerly has translated
most if not all the suttas belonging to the Paritta. I shall
take an early opportunity of giving a more elaborate account
of the compilation of the book and the different versions
which we have of it.
The other extracts given are "A Collection of Kamma-
vacas." If the Paritta was intended to represent the style
of the Sutta Pitaka, these may be taken as a fairly good
specimen of the Yinaya Pitaka. I also reserve for a later
occasion any mention of the relation of the Kammavacas
to the Vinaya Pitaka, viz. if they stand in the same rela-
tion to the Mahavagga and Cullavagga as the Patimokkha
stands to the Sutta Yibhanga. The text of the Kam-
mavacas is based on MSS. belonging to the Bodleian
Library (Pali 1 and 2). They are written in the square
character, and represent the usual Burmese orthography.
A distinction between linguals and dentals is seldom made,
nor do they write anusvdm after * and u. For several
chapters I have consulted other MSS. in the British
Museum, and some belonging to the Liverpool Free Library.
They present the same texts, and are also written in the
square painted character. Whilst examining the Liverpool
MSS., in company with Professor Rhys Davids, to whom
they had been sent by Sir James Allanson Picton for
xii PREFACE.
identification and report, we found that one of them (No.
L 24091) was of especial value, as it contained a few extra
Kammavueas not appearing in the usual text which I have
given in the Chrestomathy. Professor Spiegel and Mr.
Dickson have published part of the text (see Bibliography).
The third part contains the Glossary. I have omitted
in it all proper names. In employing two sorts of type
and hyphens I have tried to distinguish between compound
words and simple ones. Compound words ought all to have
been given under their last member, as is done in Benfey's
Sanskrit Dictionary. This is the only scientific way. The
last member in the Indo-European languages is explained
by the preceding ones, or as the late Professor Benfey put it
in his lectures, " the defining members always precede
the defined." But as all the second members did not
occur in the glossary, I had to give up this plan, and to limit
myself to using italics for compound words. I employ
capitals, however, for compound words when the individual
meaning of the component parts is another than that of the
whole word ; e. g. addhayogo was printed in capitals for that
reason. I have not attempted to explain the difierent philo-
sophical terms which occur in the extracts. I give mostly
one translation, and put a 1. 1. (technical term) after them.
Fault may perhaps be found with the explanation of
Nihhdnam as the summum bonum of the Buddhists; but
among so many different views it seems to me best neither
to offer an opinion nor to defend one.
I have given the third person singular present of the
verb, and translated this throughout with the infinitive.
The third person singular present, as is well known, has
in Indian grammar the same value as the infinitive of
modern grammar. It is the type given for the verb by the
PREFACE. xiii
native grammarians. To give the so-called root did not
commend itself to me — for two reasons. First, — the
principle of the root- theory has been recently, and not
without reason, greatly shaken, so that it would not be wise
to introduce it. Secondly, it is difficult to determine what is
the root of a Pali word. I have given the nominative case
of nouns, and here I think I may deserve some blame.
But, as is shewn in the chapter on declension, through the
working of the phonetic laws none of the declensions keeps
within its own range, and the crude form of a Pali noun is
thus not easily fixed.
I have availed myself on every occasion of all the books
published on Pali grammar, and consulted Childers's Dic-
tionary of the Pali Language. These works will be found
in the appended Bibliography. I name here more particu-
larly the works of Professors Kuhn and Minayefi", of M.
Senart, of the Terunnanse Subhuti, and of Dr. Trenckner.
I hope the Tables of Alphabets will be found useful.
In conclusion, I have to thank Dr. Morris for many
valuable suggestions, and for his kindness in looking over
the proof-sheets. I am also indebted to the authorities of
the Bodleian Library, the British Museum, and the India
Office Library, for the courtesy and ready help I have
uniformly received from them.
0. FRANKFURTER.
OxroKD, February, 1883.
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
I. PALI LITERATURE.
TuRNOUR, G. Examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals.
J.A.S. of Bengal, 1837, 1838.
Westergaard, N. L. Codices Indici bibliothecae regioe
Havniensis enumerati et descripti. Copenhagen, 1846.
Hardy, Rev. R. S. List of Books in the Pali and Singha-
lese Languages. J.R.A.S. Ceylon Branch, 1848.
Alwis, J. DE. Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit, Pali, and
Sinhalese Literary "Works of Ceylon. Colombo, 1870.
Zoysa, L. de. Catalogue of Pali, Sinhalese, and Sanskrit
Manuscripts in the Ceylon Government Oriental Library.
Colombo, 1876.
Forchhammer, E., Professor of Pali, Rangoon High School.
Report by, for the year 1879-1880.
Davids, T. W. Rhys. Report on Pali and Sinhalese.
Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1876.
Feer, L. Les nouveaux Manuscripts Palis de la biblio-
theque nationale. Annales de I'extreme Orient, 1880.
Morris, Rev. Dr. Richard. Report on Piili Literature,
1875-1880. Transactions of the Philological Society,
1881.
Haas, E. Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the
British Museum. London, 1876.
Trubner & Co. Catalogue of leading Books on Pali,
Prakrit, and Buddhist Literature. London, 1881.
xvi TALI BIBLIOORAPnY.
II. TEXTS.
ViNAYA PiTAKAM. One of the principal Buddhist Holy
Scriptures. Edited by Hermann Oldenbcrg. 5 vols.
London, 1879-1883.
Kammavaca.
Spiegel, F. Kammavjikyam, liber de officiis
buddhicorum piilice et lutine edidit. Bonn,
1841.
Anecdota Palica. Chaps, ii, iii. v.
Leipzig, 1845.
Boehtlingk, 0. Bulletin de I'Academie Imp^riale
des Sciences, 1844, No. 22, chap. iv.
Dickson, J. F. Upasampada Kammavaca. J.R.A.S.
1875.
The Pall Manuscript written on
Papyrus, preserved in the Library of the
Armenian Monastery, St. Lazaro. Venice,
1875. (This appears to be a reprint of the
preceding.)
Patimokkha.
Minayeff, J. Pratiraoksha Sutra buddijskij sluzeb-
niku izdannyj i perevedennyj. Petersburg,
1869.
Dickson, J. F. Piltlraokkha, being the Buddhist
Office of the Confession of Priests. J.R.A.S.
1876.
SUTTA PiTAKAM.
DTOHA NiKAYA.
Qrimblot, P. Sept Suttas Palis, tir^s du Digha
Nikaya. Paris, 1876.
Childers, R. C. Mahaparinibbanasutta. London,
1878.
Mahasatipatthanasutta. Maulmain, 1881.
PALI BIBLIOGRAPEY. xvii
SUTTA PlTAKAM.
SaMYUTTA NlKAYA.
Feer, H. L. Le Bhikkhuni Samyuttam, M^raoires
de la Societe d'Ethnographie, Sect. Orient,
1877.
Frankfurter, 0. Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble
Eightfold Path. J.R.A.S. 1880.
MaJJHIMA NlKAYA.
Pischel, R. A8sala3'anasuttam. Edited and trans-
lated. Chemnitz, 1880.
Anguitara Nikaya.
Morris, Rev. Dr. R. Publications of the Pali Text
Society.
Khuddaka Nikaya.
FausboU, y. The Jataka, together with its Com-
mentary. Vols. i. and ii. London, 1877,
1879.
Two Jatakas ; the original Pali text,
etc. London.
Five Jatakas. Copenhagen, 1861.
Ten Jatakas, Copenhagen, 1872.
The Dasaratha Jataka. Copenhagen,
1874.
Zachariae, Th. Die sechszehnte Erzahlung des
Vetalapaucaviri9ati. Contains the Umma-
dantl-jataka. B.B. iv. p. 375.
"Weber, A., and Fausboll, V. Die Sage von der
Entstehung des Sakya und Koliya Ge-
schlechtes. Indische Streifen i. Berlin,
1868.
Fausboll, V. Dhammapadam, ex tribus codicibus
Havniensibus Palice edidit. Copenhagen,
1855.
Childers, R. C. Khuddaka Piitha, with English
translation, etc. J.R.A.S. 1870.
Spiegel, F. Anecdota Palica. Leipzig, 1845.
Contains the Uragasutta of the Sutta Nipata.
xviii TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
SUTTA PlTAKAM.
Khuddaka Nikaya.
Alwis, J. de. Buddhist Nirvana. Colombo, 1871.
Contains extracts from the Sutta Nipata.
Morris, Rev. R. Cany a Pitaka.
Buddhavamsa. (Publications of
the Piili Text Society.)
Feer, H. L. Textes tir^s du Kandjour. 11 livraisons.
Paris, 1864-1871.
Gray, J. Ajjhatta Jaya Mangalam. Rangoon, 1881.
Grimblot, P. Extraits du Paritta, texte et commentaire,
avec introduction, traduction, notes et notices par L^on
Feer. J.A. 1871.
Feer, H. L. Fft\ides Buddhiques. J.A. 1870, etc.
Pirit Pota {i.e. Paritta). Colombo, 2411 (1869).
Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1879.
Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1881.
Mangalasutta. 2nd ed. Rangoon, 1881.
Mahavamso. In Pali and English, with an Introductory
Essay on Pali Buddhistical Literature. Vol. i. By
Q. Tumour. Colombo, 1837.
From the 37th Chapter. Translated and edited
by H. Sumangala and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantu-
dawa. 2 vols. Colombo, 1877.
DiPAVAMSA. A Buddhist Historical Record. Edited, with
an English translation, by H. Oldenberg. London, 1879.
Dhammakitti. The Dathavamsa, the Pali text and its
translation into English. By Mutu Coomdra Swamy.
London, 1874.
Hatthavanagallavamsa. The Attanagalluvansa. Trans-
lated from the Pali by J. d* Alwis, with the Pali text.
Colombo, 1866.
MiLiNDAPANHO. Being Dialogues between King Milinda
and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. Edited by V.
Trenckner. London, 1880.
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. xlx
III. TRANSLATIONS.
Clough, Rev. B. The Ritual of the Buddhist Priesthood.
Translated from the original Pali work entitled Karma-
vakya (Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental "Writers,
vol. ii. London, 1834).
Beal, Rev. S., and Gogerly, Rev. D. J. Comparative
Arrangement of Two Translations of the" Buddhist
Ritual for the Priesthood. London, 1862.
Davids, T. W. Rhys, and Oldenberg, H. Vinaya Texts.
Translated from the Pali. Part I. The Piitimokkha ;
the Mahiivagga. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the
East, vol. xiii.)
Davids, T. W. Rhys. Buddhist Suttas. Oxford, 1881.
(Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi. Contains the Maha-
parinibbtina Sutta, the Tevijja Sutta, the Mahasudassana
Sutta, the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta, the Sabba-
sava Sutta.)
Buddhist Birth Stories, or Jataka
Tales. London, 1880.
Weber, A. Dhammapadam (Indische Streifen).
MtJLLER, F. Max. Buddha's Dhammapada. Translated
from Pali. (Buddhaghosha's Parables. Translated from
Burmese by H. T. Rogers. London, 1870.)
Dhammapada ; a Collection of Verses,
translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of
the East, vol. x. part 1.)
Hu, Ferd. Dhammapadam traduit en Fran9ais, avec intro-
duction et notes. Paris, 1878.
SwAMY, Sir M. Coomara. Sutta Nipata, or the Dialogues
of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the Pali, with
Introduction and Notes. London, 1874.
Faxjsboll, V. The Sutta Nipata ; a Collection of Discourses,
translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of
the East, vol. x. part 2.)
XX PALI BIBLIOGRAPnT.
IV. DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS, AND
GRAMMATICAL PAPERS.
MoGOALLANA Thero. Abhidlulnappadlpiku, with English
and Sinhalese Interpretations, etc. By Waskaduwe
Subhuti. Colombo, 1865.
Childers, R. C. A Dictionary of the Pali Language.
London, 1875.
Clough, B. a Compendious Pali Grammar, with a Copious
Vocabulary in the same Language. Colombo, 1824.
BuKNouF, E., and Lassen, Chr. Essai sur le Pali. Paris,
1826.
Observations grammaticales sur quelques
passages de I'essai sur le Pali. Paris, 1827.
Storck, "W. De declinatione nominum in lingua Piilica.
Berlin, 1858.
Casuum in lingua Palica formatio. Miinster,
1862.
MiJLLER, F. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Pali Sprache.
Vols. i. ii. iii. Vienna, 1867-1869.
MiNAYEFF, J. Gram'maire Palie, traduite par St. Guyard.
Paris, 1874.
KuHN, E. W. A. Beitrage zur Pali Grammatik. Berlin, 1875.
ToRP, A, Die Flexion des Pali in ihrem Verhaltnis zum
Sanskrit. Christiania, 1881.
Trenckner, V. Pali Miscellany. Vol. i. London, 1879.
GoLDSCHMiDT, S. Prukritica. Strassburg, 1879.
BIlavataro. Pandita Devarakkhitacariyena Samsodhito.
Colombo, 1869* [2412 a.b.].
Kaccayana.
Alwis, J. de. Introduction to Kaccayana's Grammar
of the Pali Language. Colombo, 1863.
KuHN, E. W. A. Kaccayanappakaranae specimen.
Halle, 1869.
„ „ specimen
alterum. Halle, 1871.
TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. xxi
Kaccayana.
Mason, F. The Piili Text of Kachcliayano's Graraniar,
with English Annotations. Toongoo, 1871.
Senart, E. Kaccayana et la litterature grammaticale
du Pali, l"* Partie. Paris, 1871.
SIlavamsa. Kaccayana's Dhatumanjusa. Edited, with
a translation in Sinhalese and English, by Deva-
rakkhita. Colombo, 1872.
Waskaduwe Subhuti. Naraamala, or a "Work on Pali
Grammar. Ceylon, 1876.
Sumangala. Declension and Conjugation of Pali "Words.
Edited by M. Gunaratana. Ceylon, 1873.
Sangharakkhita Thera. Subodhalahkara. (Pali Studies,
by Major G. E. Fryer.) Calcutta, 1875.
"Vuttodaya. Edited, with trans-
lation and notes, by Major G. E. Fryer. Calcutta, 1877.
Yuttodaya, die Pali Metrik des
herausgegeben von J. Minayeff. Melanges Asia-
tiques, vi.
Childers, R. C. On Sandhi in Pali. J.R.A.S. n.s. iv.
p. 309.
Dakkh in Pali. K.B. viii. p. 150.
The Prakrit Dekkh. K.B. vii. p. 450.
PiscHEL, R. Die wurzeln ^pekkh, dakkh und dekkh in
Prakrit. K.B. vii. p. 453.
"Weber, A. Zur Yerstiindigung. K.B. vii. p. 458.
PiscHEL, R. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiii. p. 423.
Jacobi, H. Vocaleinschub in Pali. K.Z. xxiii. p. 594.
ZiMMER, H. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiv. p. 220.
Oldenberq, H. Bemerkungen zur Paligrammatik. K.Z.
XXV. p. 314.
GoLDscHMiDT, S. Priikritische Miscellen. K.Z. xxv.
pp. 436, 610. Z.D.M.G. xxxii. p. 99.
PiscHEL, R. Pali acchati. B.B. iii. p. 155.
Die de9lcabdas bei Trivikrama. B.B. iiL
p. 255.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
abl.=: ablative.
ace. = accusative.
adj. = adjective.
adv. = adverb.
aor.=aori8t.
attn.=atmane.
caus. = causative.
comp., cp.=eompare.
cond. =conditional.
conj. = con junction.
dat.= dative.
f. = fem.
foil. = following.
fr. = from.
fut. = future.
gen. = genitive.
ger. = gerund.
Imperat. = Imperative.
inf. = infinitive.
instr. = instrumental.
loc.=locative.
m. = masculine.
n. = neuter.
num. = numeral.
opt. = optative.
p. f. p. = participle of
future passive,
p. p. = participle present.
the
p. p. p. = participle of the per-
fect passive.
par.=para8mai.
part. = particle.
pass. = passive.
pers.= person.
pe=peyyalo, etc.
pi. = plural.
prep. = preposition.
pres. = present.
pret. = preterite.
sep. = separately.
sing. = singular.
t.t.= technical term.
voc.= vocative.
J. A. = Journal Asiatique.
J. II. A. S. = Journal of the
Royal Asiatic Society.
B. B. = Bezzenberger, bei-
trage sur kunde der indo-
germanischen sprachen.
K.B. = Kuhn's Beitrage.
K.Z =Kuhn*8 zeitschrift fiir
vergleichende sprachfor-
schung.
Z. D. M. G. = Zeitschrift d.
deutschen morgenlan-
dischen gesellschaft.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
PART I.
AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR.
§ 1. THE ALPHABET.
Pali, the sacred language of the Buddhists, is written,
according to the countries from which the MSS. come, either
in Sinhalese (Ceylon), Burmese (Burma), or Karabodian
(Siam) characters. The system of writing in the original
characters is syllabic and consonantal (as will be seen from
the appended table).
To transliterate these characters the following system is
now mostly adopted : —
u u e 0
urn
g gh n
j jh n
d {I) dh (/h) n
d dh n
b hh m
I V
§ 2. PRONUNCIATION.
The vowels are pronounced in the Continental way. The
short a has mostly the indistinct sound as in English hut.
The uasal vowels are now pronounced in Ceylon and Burma
1
Vowels :
a a
it
Nasal vowels ;
: am
im
Consonants :
k'
kh
c
ch
t
th
t
'th
P
ph
y
r
8
2 PALI GRAMMAR.
like the guttural nasal in English hang. e and o are
metrically always long, but pronounced short before two
consonants.
The consonants are pronounced in the manner known from
Sanskrit grammar.
c is English ch.
» is the Spanish ti and French ng in campagne.
V is pronounced as English or French v, except when
preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case
it has the sound of English w.
The aspirated letters, surd and sonant, are pronounced as
the corresponding non-aspirates followed by /*.
The sound of the nasal is defined by the letter which
follows it, cf. English hang, hand, bench, hemp.
§ 3. CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
All the vowels and consonants are arranged by the native
grammarians under the following classes : —
1) a k kh g gh h and h are considered gutturals (kanthaja).
2) t c chjjh n and y are termed palatals {tdluja).
3) u p ph h bh m are termed labials {oHhaja).
4) t th d (/) dh (Ih) n r are termed linguals {muddhaja)}
5) t th d dh n I .t are termed dentals {dantaja).
6) e is termed gutturo-palatal [kaiithatdluja).
7) 0 is termed gutturo-labial {kantkoUhaja).
8) V is termed dento-labial (dantolthqja) ,
% 4. VOWELS.
1) Pali being one of the Indian dialects, is best con-
sidered in comparison with one of those dialects of which the
grammar is already firmly established, viz. Sanskrit.
» In the Sacred Books of the East, edited by Prof. Max Miiller, the palatals
are printed, like gutturals, in italics, and the cerebrals likewise as dentals in
italics, thus : k kh g gh n, t th d dh n.
This transliteration seems to imply that the palatals arise always from the
gutturals, and that they stand in the same relation to these as the linguals stand to
the dentals. This is, howerer, not the case in Pali.
The system adopted in this handbook is used in most of the texts published up to
the present time, such as Dr. Oldenbcrg's edition of the Vinayapi^aka, Prof.
Fausbiill's Jataka, and also in Childers's Dictionary of the Pali Language.
SHORT VOWELS. 3
2) In comparing Piili with Sanskrit forma, it must always
be kept in mind that Sanskrit is not to be regarded as the
parent language : but as the dialect which best represents
the primitive Aryan speech, to which Sanskrit and Pali stand
in the relation of elder and younger sisters.
In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, we
find that Pali has no written characters for the r and / vowels.
It has not the diphthongs ai au, and lacks the long nasal
vowels.
We find therefore in Pali three short vowels a i u, and five
long vowels a I u e o, and three nasal vowels am hn urn, which
are also considered long, and which are technically called
niggahlta.
As to the accent, which plays such a conspicuous part in
Vedic Sanskrit, no accented texts have been handed down.
It is, however, clear that Pali possessed a free accent
just as much as Sanskrit, and every other Aryan language.
It is now the fashion in Ceylon and Burma to give the accent
to the long syllable in every word.
A syllable is considered long, if it contains one
of the long, or nasal vowels, or a short vowel
followed by two consonants.
A Pali word may only end in a vowel or nasal vowel.
For exceptions see the chapter on Sandhi.
§ 5. SHORT VOWELS.
In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, it will
be seen that the short vowels a i u correspond as a rule to
those of Sanskrit.
A short vowel followed by two consonants corresponds to
a Sanskrit long vowel ; thus we have : — maggo Skr. nijirga
* path ' ; majjdro Skr. miirjara ' cat ' ; ratti Skr. ratri * night' ;
saddhim Skr. sardham * with ' ; ikkhati Skr. Ikshati * to
look * ; kitti Skr. kirti * fame ' ; tittham Skr. tirtha ' landing-
place*; t//<!«^^o Skr. dhurta 'gamester'; mutlam Skr. mutra
' urine ' ; suttam Skr. sutra.
4 PALI GRAMMAB.
An original long vowel following a simple consonant
can arbitrarily be shortened by doubling the consonant.
This seems only to be graphic, as in the metre no difference
is made between a form hahunnam and bahunam, gen. plur.
m. and n. of ba/iu ' much,' or al/dpo and d/dpo 'speech.'
In the gen. plur. m. and n. of the numerals tinnam pahcan-
nam channam the forms with doubled nasals are in use.
The syllable ya is changed to i. Among the examples
given is nigrodho for Skr. nyagrodha, majjhimo for Skr.
madhyarad. The process called samprasarana.
In the same way va is contracted into u in such words as
latukikd Skr. latvakii * quail.'
§ 6. Pali has, as was shown above, no written character
corresponding to the Sanskrit r and / vowels.
It is a well-known fact that those two vowels originate in
Sanskrit and other languages for the most part through the
abbreviation of a syllable which contains an r or /through
the influence of the accent.
Theoretically, therefore, one would expect to find in Pali
a short syllable containing an r or / element. This r or I
element may be inherent in the vowel. We find a whole
syllable with the consonant r to represent the Sanskrit vowel.
r, practically speaking, therefore, is represented in Pali by
one of the short vowels a i u or by the consonant r in con-
junction with one of the vowels a i m, which in this case are
vowel fractures (svarabhakti).
There is no fixed rule for the use of these vowels, and in
difierent, sometimes in the same, texts, they are used in-
diflferently in the case of the same word, and the divergency
in the use of these vowels shows that they were employed in
a merely tentative way to indicate the sound in writing.
1) a=r in kato Skr. krta ' made * ; gmihdti Skr. grhnuti * to
seize * ; mato Skr. mrtd ' dead ' ; ianhTt Skr. trshna ' lust.'
2) i=^r in isi Skr. rshi *a sage' ; kicco Skr. krtyd ' what is to be
done' ; pitthatn pitlhl Skr. prshtha ' back ' ; inam Skr. rn4 * debt.'
3) M=r in samvitto Skr. saravrtd 'restrained'; uju Skr. rjd
' straight.'
4) r=r in iritvyo Skr. ytvij *a priest'; iru Skr. re 'hymn';
LONG VOWELS. 6
bi'uheti Skr. brmbayati * to increase ' ; hrohd Skr. brh&nt
* great ' ; ruhkho Skr. vrkshd * tree.'
5) r=« or i or u in the same word :
niigo mago Skr. mrga * antelope ' ; accho ikko Skr. rksha
'bear*; pathavi put hurl Skr. prthivi 'earth'; sati sainuti Skr.
smrti * thought ' ; vuddhi vaddhi Skr. vrddhi * increase.'
The long r vowel is of later development in Sanskrit, and
has therefore no equivalent in Pali.
The so-called root klip, the only one which contains an
/ vowel, in Sanskrit becomes kappati.
§ 7. In comparing Pali words with corresponding Sanskrit,
in several instances a difference in the vowels is to be found.
This is generally the case in unaccented syllables,
and the reason for such a practice lies in assimila-
tion. In several instances, however, words are used with
both vowels.
muti mati Skr. mati * mind ' ; pana puna Skr. punar ; puriso
puruso Skr. purusha 'man ' ; ucchu Skr. ikshu ' sugar-cane.'
Pukkuso Skr. Pukka9a ; Kondantio Skr. Kaundinya ;
candimd Skr. candramas ' moon ' ; saddhim Skr. sardham ;
jigucchati Skr. jugupsati ' to dislike ' ; timisam tamisam
Skr. tamisra * darkness ' ; Timingalo Titnihgilo Skr. Timingila ;
nitthuhhati nutthubhati Skr. nishthiv ' to spit out ' ; muca-
lindo Skr. mucilinda * a tree ' ; dyasma Skr. ayushmant
* venerable ' ; kutumbam kutitnbam Skr. kutumba ' family.'
Where a difference in the vowel takes place in conjunction
with one of the semivowels or nasals, the vowels only desig-
nate a partial vowel, such as in garu Skr. guru, Greek ^apv,
§ 8. LONG VOWELS.
The long vowels a i u agree with the corresponding
Sanskrit, with the exception above stated, that a long vowel
followed by two consonants is represented in Pali by
a short one.
1) a: d=a 'the prep.' sddhu Skr. sadhu 'good'; data
Skr. datr * giver.'
2) T : iti Skr. Iti ' calamity * ; gltam Skr. gita * a song ' ;
j'nitam Skr. jivita 'life.'
6 TALI GRAMMAR.
3) u : &no Skr. iina ' deficient * ; 8upo Skr. supa * broth ' ;
mulho Skr. mudha ' foolish.*
§ 9. The long vowels e and o correspond to the Skr. diph-
thongs e and o, and sometimes to the diphthongs ai an.
They combine therefore guna and vrddhi of i and u, and
they go back to these vowels accordingly, before a compound
consonant.
1) e: eti Skr. eti 'he goes'; ekam Skr. eka 'one'; hetu
Skr. hetu ' cause.*
jeguccho ' contemptible ' goes back to jigucchd ; keldso
* suffering from a cutaneous complaint ' to kilaso.
ediso eriso edikkho erikkho * such ' to idam.
gelanfiam 'sickness' to gildno, in which, however, the • is
svarabhakti for Skr. gluna.
2) E=Skr. ai :
Eravano Skr. AirJivana.
etihyam Skr. aitihya ' traditional instruction.'
ekdgdriko Skr. aikjigarika * a thief.'
3) aya is contracted to e in the middle of a word ; katheti=
kathayati ' to relate ' ; jeti^-jayati ' to conquer.'
4) e arises out the contraction of avi in e.g. thero Skr.
sthavira * an elder.*
1) o: okam Skr. okas 'a house'; ojo Skr. ojas 'splendour';
lobho ' covetousness ' from luhhati Skr. lobha ' to be greedy ' ;
tnoho Skr. moho ' delusion ' ; doso Skr. dosha ' blemish.*
pothujjaniko ' belonging to an unconverted person,*
puthujjano ; this latter stands for Skr. prthak. A form
puthujjaniko, however, is also given.
2) o=Skr. au :
opammam Skr. aupamya 'comparison.'
orahbhiko Skr. aurabhrika ' a shepherd.'
odariko and odaro Skr. audiirika ' greedy.'
3) ava is contracted to o in the beginning of a word ; the
fuller form is almost always also in use: otdro and avatdro
' descent ' ; okdro avakdro * vileness.'
4) 0 sometimes arises from the vocalisation of v and its
combinations with d as hoti=.bhavati and dhovati Skr.
\/dhav ' to wash.'
CONSONANTS. 7
§ 10. THE NASAL VOWELS.
The nasal of every class, if preceded by a vowel, may
arbitrarily become niggahlta. They correspond in every
respect to Sanskrit.
For a nasalized vowel, a simple long one can be substituted:
nho ' lion ' for Skr. simha ; tlsati Skr. vim9ati. sam very
often becomes sa : sdrdgo ' possessed of passion.*
Every one of the five nasals can, before any other con-
sonant or nasal, become niggahlta. The MSS. vary greatly
in the expression of the nasals : mn/io, anno, ' other,' pamha,
pofiha and panha 'question.' In very many cases the long
vowel and the nasalized vowel appear in the same word.
In later texts a short vowel is often nasalized : nagaram
becomes nahgaram. This seems, however, a mistake of the
Sinhalese copyists.
§ 11. INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS.
By the side of hhlyo bhiyi/oz^Skr. bhuyas we find yehlmyyo
yehhuyo, which is a contraction of yad+ bhuyas.
Skr. a appears as u in the last part of such compounds as
addhagu katannu, which stand respectively for Skr. adhvaga
and krtajiia.
In merayam 'intoxicating liquor,' Skr. maireya, second e
appears in Pali as a. In milakkJw Skr. mleccho the Pali
preserves the older form. It stands for mlaska.
We sometimes find the gunated forms of words in Pali by
the side of Sanskrit ungunated.
§ 12. CONSONANTS.
The consonants are divided by the native grammarians
into ghosavd * sounding,' and aghosd * surd.' They are : —
Ghosava : g, gh, h \ j, jh, n ; d, dh^ n ; d, dh, n ; b, bh, m ;
y, r, /, V, h.
Aghosa : k^ kh ; c, cA ; t, th ; t, th\ p, ph ; 8.
The simple consonants of Piili mostly agree with those of
Sanskrit and the other Indo-European languages.
8 TALI GRAMMAR.
The Gutturals, Palatals, Linguals, Dentals, Labials, as well
as the semivowels and « and /t, correspond in Sanskrit and
Pali.
Piili possesses all the consonants of Sanskrit, with the excep-
tion of the palatal and lingual sibilant; the last of which is even
in Sanskrit of late origin, and occurs only in the numeral
8h(Vih and its derivatives, and in a few words in conjunction
with the linguals according to phonetic rules. The dental
sibilant « takes the place of the three sibilants of Sanskrit.
However, the aspirated surd palatal is found in, eg.
chokam Skr. 9akrt * dung ' ; chdpo Skr. yava * young of an
animal ' ; chavo Skr. 9ava * a corpse.*
Skr. shash, which goes back to a form svaks, is represented
in Pali by the form cha and chal.
% 13. PHONETIC CHANGES.
None of the changes pervades the whole grammar ; they
only take place optionally, and can scarcely be called con-
sistent. In most instances the leading motive for the change
is euphony or false analogy ; in many instances also two
forms occur, of which one preserves intact the form known
from Sanskrit grammar.
General Remarks.
1) For Skr. mleccha Piili has milakkho *a stranger.* Here
the Piili form is the older one, just as in bhhakko Skr. bhishaj
* physician.'
2) Palatals, in conjunction with one of the semivowels
y, V, become sometimes dentals,
3) Cerebrals /, M, can optionally be substituted for d, dh,
in the middle of a word between vowels, the difference only
being graphic, e.g.
khiddd kild Skr. krTda * play * ; mulho mudho Skr. mudha
' foolish ' ; dalho Skr. drdha * firm.'
4) Through the influence of r, vowel or consonant, and
« and /*, the dentals are sometimes made cerebrals, e.g.
dahali Skr. v/dah * to burn * ; daddho Skr. dagdhd * burnt.*
PHONETIC CHANGES. 9
ha to Skr. hrtd * seized ' ; pati Skr. prati * to.'
upaft/idpanam Skr. upastliiipana * providing.*
5) l=:d is substituted sometimes for n, e.g. muldlo Skr.
mrnala * lotus-fibre ' ; vein venu Skr. venu * bamboo.'
6) An interchange between d and r takes places, e.g. in
ekdddsa ekdrasa ' eleven ' ; ediso eriso * such.'
7) The mutes of one class are occasionally used for the
mutes of another :
Pakudho and Kakudho.
kipiUiko and kipi/lako Skr. pipllika * ant.'
gadduhano Skr. dadrughna * good for leprosy.*
takkollam Skr. kakkola ' bdellium.'
samputito sahkutito sahkucito from Skr. y/ kut or \/ kuc
'shrivelled'; cikicchati and tikicchali Skr. cikits 'to care';
jighncchd dighacchd Skr. jighatsa * hunger.'
8) For sonants the surds appear : —
pdtu Skr. priidur (in comp.).
akildsu Skr. aglasnu ' healthy.*
chakalo Skr. chagala ' a he-goat.*
palikho paligho Skr. parigha 'an iron beam.*
mudihgo mutihgo Skr. mrdanga ' a kettle-drum.*
thakam Skr. sthagana ' covering.'
chdpo Skr. 9a va ' young of an animal.'
paldpo Skr. palava * chafi*,' perhaps through tbe influence
of paldpo Skr. pralapa * nonsense.'
avdpiirati and apdpurati Skr. ava-j- \/vr ' to open.' Several
derivatives of sad show t in the place of d.
9) An interchange between surd and sonants takes
place, e.g.:
Sdgald Skr. Qiikala ; elamugo Skr, edamuka ' deaf and
dumb.'
Nighandu Skr. Nighantu.
For the cerebral t in such instances / appears, e.g.
dlaviko Skr. iitavika ' dwelling in forests ' ; cakkavdlam and
cakkabdio for Skr. cakraviita and cakrabala.
10) We find v interchanged with p in the same word, and
vice versd. This last change seems only graphic, e.g.
kavi kapi Skr. kapi ' a monkey.'
10 TALI GRAMMAR.
11) A change takes place sometimes between the sonant
aspirates, for which the aspirate h is substituted.
lahu laghu Skr. laghu * light ' ; holi by the side of hhacati
Skr. bhavati ; but also idha and iha for Skr. iha ' hither,'
where the original form is, perhaps, preserved in Piili.
12) n and / are frequently interchanged in Piili, e.g.
nahgalarfi lahgalam Skr. liingala *a plough'; pilandhanam
Skr. pinaddha ' an ornament.'
Semivowels.
1) y is inserted in a word to avoid hiatus after a consonant
has been elided between two vowels, e.g. khdyito P.P.P. from
khadati Skr. v/khad ' to eat ' ; sdyaniyo from sdyati for Skr.
svadate * to taste.'
For the same reason it appears as if y was interchangeable
with V in such words as dniso voc. to ayasma, where it stands
for duso.
2) y is interchangeable with r in antardrati and antardyati
* to run into danger ' Skr. antaraya * danger, impediment ' ;
nahdru Skr. snayu * a sinew.'
3) r is interchangeable with /, e.g. taluno taruno Skr. taruna
* tender ' ; cattalisam cattarlmm Skr. catvarira9at * forty ' ;
further in some of the numerals where r is interchanged with
d, telasa terasa and tedasa Skr. trayoda^an 'thirteen.' jaldbu
corresponds to Skr. jariiyu 'womb'; halidydhho haliddo and
hari correspond to Skr. haridrabha and hari * yellow.'
4) Purindado, an epithet of Indra, corresponds to a Skr.
Purandara, the change being due to false etymology, just as
in. palihodha 'obstacle,' where two roots have been confounded.
5) For /, r is substituted occasionally, and the former is
generally the original sound : kira Skr. kila ' they say ' ;
drammanam Skr. iilambana ' support, basis * ; arahjaro Skr.
alinjara ' waterpot.'
6) We find / for Skr. d in bubbulam budbuda ' a bubble.'
Nasals.
The MSS. greatly vary in the expression of the nasals.
No fixed rules can therefore be given, as also the native
COMPOUND CONSONANTS. H
grammarians are at variance in this respect. It may,
however, be stated that r, h and s cerebralize a dental nasal,
which then is interchangeable with the palatal nasal.
§ 14. COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
In the beginning of every Pali word only vowels, simple
consonants, or consonants in conjunction with the semivowels
y, V, r, occur. Assimilation is the commonest means of eflfecting
this change. This assimilation, of course, considerably alters
the shape of a word, and therefore, when a word commences
with a vowel or simple consonant in Sanskrit, in Pali also
a vowel or simple consonant appears; whereas, if a double
consonant, otherwise than in conjunction with y, r, v, com-
mences a word, the corresponding word in Pali takes a
different form.
The same rules which apply to the beginning of a word
also apply to the middle of a word. Here, also, conjunct
consonants, belonging to different classes, are avoided
through the help of assimilation, or through the insertion
of a vowel.
The rules of assimilation apply to the beginning of a word
as well as to the middle, and if, at the beginning of a word,
a simple consonant is exhibited, the word takes in com-
position always the two sounds from which the simple sound
originated.
The chief rule for assimilation is, that of two consonants
the former is entirely assimilated to the latter. The two
sounds, if the one was a surd, the other a sonant, are assimilated
(viz. the final letter is assimilated to the following initial) ;
a perfect assimilation takes place, so that the two sounds
are not only made to belong to one class, but also to the
same order. In Piili itself it will be sufl&cient if the last of
these processes is pointed out, as the first has taken place in
common with other Indian dialects, anterior to the
fixing of the Pali language.
A second means of avoiding conjunct consonants was the
insertion of a vowel between two letters. This could only
12 TALI GRAMMAR.
take place when one of the letters was a semivoicel or a nasal,
in either of which the part of a vowel (svarabhakti) is
already inherent.
It remains now to consider the Phonetic changes which
tuke place in the word itself :
1) It is self-evident that when two consonants belonging
to the same class meet together, they are preserved intact, e.g.
cittani Skr. citta * mind, thought ' ; lajjd Skr. lajja * shame * ;
annam Skr. anna ' food..'
2) Mutes + Mutes are Assimilated.
k + t =tt lattakam Skr. laktaka *a red dye'; wM/^d Skr.
raukta 'pearl ' ; mutto Skr. mukta * released.'
k-{-th=ztth sittham Skr. siktha 'bee's wax'; satthi Skr.
sakthi * thigh.'
g-\-dh=.ddh duddho Skr. dugdha 'milked.*
g-\-hh=.bhh pahbharo Skr. pragbhara *a cave.*
d-\-g ^=gg sagguno Skr. sadguna * good quality ' ; puggalo
Skr, pudgala ' individual.*
d-\-gh=:.ggh ugghoso Skr. udghosha 'proclamation'; uggharati
Skr. ud+ \/ghr ' to open.'
d-\-h =^bb bubbulam Skr. budbuda 'a bubble.*
d-\-bh = bbh abbhufo Skr. adbhuta 'wonderful, mysterious.*
p-\-t =U tatfo Skr. tapta ' burnt.'
b-\-j =^jj khvjjo Skr. kubja 'limping,*
b'\-d =.dd saddo Skr. 9abda ' sound.'
b+dh=ddh laddho Skr. labdha ' taken.*
3) Mutes + Nasals.
ASSIMILATION. SVAKABIIAKTI.
k ■\-n sakkoti sakunati Skr. 9aknoti * to be
able.*
k + m rumma rukuma Skr. rukma * gold.*
g +n naggo Skr. nagnd
* naked '
aggi aggini gini Skr. agni ' fire.*
gh 4- n agghd Skr. aghnat * not
kiUing.'
SEMIVOWELS. 13
A8SIMILATI0IT. STAKABHAKTI.
/ +n fl'ww Skr. ajnji. 'command.'
fidti Skr. jfiati * kinsman.'
d •{•m kudumalo Skr. kudmala *an
opening bud.'
t +» sappatto Skr. sapatna
' hostile.' ratanam Skr. ratna * jewel.'
gahapatdnl Skr. grhapatnl
* housewife.'
t + m attd atumd Skr. atman * self.'
th + n mattho Skr. mathna
* shaking.'
rf +m chaddam Skr. chadman
' roof.' padumam Skr. padma * lotus.'
dh-\-m idhumam Skr. idhma * fire-
wood.'
p -^-n pappoti pdpiinati Skr. prapnoti * he
obtains.'
4) Nasal + surd remains mostly unchanged.
However, by the side of amhd Skr. amba * mother,' we
have amwd, and by the side of paaca ' five,' paJihdsa and
pamidsa Skr. panca9at * fifty,' where the nn is probably due
to the influence of s.
Further, hhdjiako * a jar ' by the side of hhandaham
* a utensil ' Skr. bhanda.
6) Of two nasals the first is assimilated to the second, eg. :
ninnam Skr. nirana 'depth.'
jammam Skr. janman 'birth.'
Semivowels.
6) No fixed rules can be given, y, after gutturals, palatals,
labials, and the sibilant s, is either preserved or assimilated,
alwaj's so that the semivowel is assimilated to the preceding
consonant (not as is the case with mutes in conjunction with
mutes where the first sound is assimilated to the second) or
a vowel is inserted between the mutes and the semivowel.
An example will suffice :
Sdkiyo Sakyo Sakko Skr. Qilkya.
14 PALI GRAMMAR.
7) j is made through the influence of // arbitrarily a dental
in dosino ISkr. jyotsnii * a moonlit night,* but we have also
junhd ; daddallati Skr. jiijvalyate * to blaze.*
jijd eindjif/d Skr. jya * a bowstring.*
8) The preposition abhi before vowels becomes ahhha. We
have, of course, simple assimilation. Is gheppati pass, to
Vgrah *to take *= Skr. grbhyate?
9) In conjunction with the sibilants we have :
dlasiyani diasyam dlassam Skr. alasya * sloth.*
sdlo Skr. 9yala * brother-in-law.*
10) The dentals in conjunction with y are palatalized or
kept intact.
c and ch sometimes represent the surd dentals when
followed by y and j, and j'h, the sonant dentals in con-
junction with y. The dental nasal -\-y Ib also palatalized,
becoming tiFi.
The preposition adhi before vowels becomes aj'/ha ; ati in
the same way ace ; iti ' thus ' becomes ice. A form atyappo, is
of frequent occurrence, this form, however, only shows i=^y
before a vowel.
Other examples are :
paecmo Skr. pratyiisha * dawn ' ; saceo Skr. satya * true ' ;
cdgo Skr. tyaga * abandoning ' ; majjam Skr. madya * strong
drink'; majjho Skr. madhya 'middle*; hnjjo Skr. hrdya 'dear.*
11) r, in conjunction with y, is either assimilated or both
letters are preserved intact with intervening vowel. If
assimilation takes place, r is always assimilated to y, thus
we find yy, not rr, which never occurs in Pali.
Cpr. ariyo and ayyo Skr. arya and arya ' noble.*
bhariyd and hhayyd Skr. bhiirya * wife.'
kdn'yo and kayyo Skr. karya * that ought to be done.*
12) In a few instances r+y is assimilated to //, as in
pallahko Skr. paryanka ' couch.*
13) l-\-y is either preserved or y is assimilated to /=//.
kalydno and kalldno Skr. kalyuna ' fortunate.*
mllo Skr. 5alya ' an arrow * ; nallako Skr. 9alyaka * a
porcupine.*
14) v-\-y is difierently treated if it begins a word or if it
is in the middle of a word.
SEMIVOWELS. 15
vy, according to Burmese and Siamese manuscripts, be-
comes hy, whilst the Sinhalese write vy throughout at the
beginning of a word, vydmo or hydmo Skr. vyama *a fathom.'
This is often assimilated to v : vdio Skr. vyala * snake.'
In the middle of a word it is either written 6y, ty, or
with assimilation hb, or, though less frequently, yy.
From kavi *a wise man, a poet,' kahbam and kavyam Skr.
kavya * poetry.'
pattabbo, but also pattayyo and pattabyo Skr. praptavya
* attainable.'
The preposition vi becomes by before vowels.
15) h-\-y appears as yh, just as for A + r, the metathesis vh
takes place. Besides this, we have assimilation and svarabhakti.
asayho Skr. asahya * unendurable.' The participle P.P.
from lehati is leyyo Skr. lehya ' to lick ' ; hiyo and hiyyo
appear for Skr. hyas * yesterday.*
16) ;* before gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials
and the sibilant s is mostly assimilated.
saggo Skr. svarga * heaven ' ; dlgho Skr. dirgha * long,' but
digghikd * an oblong pond ' ; maggo Skr. marga * path ' ;
kakkatako Skr. karkataka * a crab.' In sakkhard Skr. 9arkara
* a potsherd,' we find aspiration.
accati Skr. -v/arc * to honour ' ; ajjavam Skr. arjava * recti-
tude ' ; maijdro Skr. marjiira * a cat * ; nijjaro Skr. nirjara
'free from decay'; khajju Skr. kharju 'itching'; gajjati
Skr. Vgarj * to roar ' ; miicchd Skr. murcha ' fainting.*
pakinnako Skr. praklrnaka * miscellaneous ' ; unno Skr. urna
* wool ' ; ramio Skr. varna * colour.'
Before dentals assimilation takes place, and the dental is
sometimes altered to a cerebral. The MSS., however, differ
greatly in the use of dental and cerebral letters.
We have kitti Skr. kirti ' fame * ; kevatto Skr. kaivarta
' fisherman ' ; vattati and vattati Skr. y/\rt ; addho and addho
Skr. ardha' half.'
sappo Skr. sarpa * a snake * ; tappati Skr. Vtrp * to be
glad ' ; gabbho Skr. garbha * womb ' ; dabbho Skr. darbha
' kuca grass ' ; dhamrno Skr. dharma ' law ' ; katnmam Skr.
karman * action ' ; Nammadd Skr. Narmada * Nerbudda.'
16 TALI GRAMMAR.
17) r-\-r=zbb: nibbdrtam Skr. nirvana (a technical term) ;
gnbbo Skr. garva * pride * ; pabbato Skr. parvata ' mountain ' ;
ubbt ' earth ' Skr. urvl.
18) r-\-h. In this combination both letters are preserved
with or without an inserted vowel: arahu Skr. arhant; tarahi
tarhi Skr. tarhi * then ' ; garahati Skr. Vgarh * to blame.*
19) If r follows gutturals, it is either assimilated or a
"vowel is inserted, and both letters are preserved. In case of
assimilation the guttural is optionally aspirated.
cakkam Skr. cakra *a wheel*; akkodho Skr. akrodha 'mild-
ness * ; kujjhati Skr. -v/^rudh * to be angry * ; gdhati Skr.
-v/grah * to take * ; ghdyati Skr. -v/ghrii * to smell ' ; aggo Skr.
agra * first ' ; kiriyd kriyd Skr. kriya ; kkiddd kild Skr. krida
•play.'
20) For r followed by a palatal cpr. vajiro Skr. vajra
' thunderbolt,' and paj'tro Skr. pajra * firm.*
21) Dentals followed by r are either assimilated or preserved
intact, r sometimes aspirates a preceding dental. Optionally,
also, the dental is changed to a cerebral. In many instances
we find three forms :
kutra, kuttha, kutta Skr. kutra ' where ' ; gattam Skr. gatra
* limb ' ; sattu satthu Skr. 9atru * enemy * ; bhadro bhaddo Skr.
bhadra * good * ; giddho Skr, grdhra * greedy ' ; Dd/nilo Skr.
Dravida ; dravo davo Skr. drava * liquid ' ; chuddho khuddho
Skr. kshudra * mean.'
22) After labials, r is assimilated: /)fl//Skr. prati (a prep.) ;
pa Skr. pra (in compos.) ; pdno Skr. pnTna * breath * ; pii/o
Skr. priya * dear * ; bhdmo Skr. bhrama ' whirling * ; sappamio
Skr. sa+prajna * wise.*
br is preserved in Brahmd Skr. Brahman ; bravlti Skr.
■v/bru *to speak.*
mr is assimilated in the beginning : makkheti Skr. v/mrksh
* to anoint' ; miyyati miyati Skr. v/mr * to die.'
For mr in the middle of a word, cfr. ambo Skr. amra * the
mango tree ' ; tambo Skr. tamra * copper.*
23) v-\-r in the beginning of a word is assimilated to r, in
the middle of a word it always becomes bb.
vajati Skr. \/vraj * to walk ' ; hut pabbojati Skr. pra+ v^vraj
SEMIVOWELS. 17
* to go forth'; vajo Skr. vraja *a cow-pen*; subbato Skr.
suvrata * conscientious ' ; tibbo Skr. tlvra ' sharp.*
24) r, after sibilants, is assimilated :
sdvako Skr. 9rdvako * pupil, follower ' ; sauu Skr. 9va9ru
* mother-in-law ' ; assu Skr. a9ru * a tear * ; sitnoti Skr. y/<}r\x
* to hear ' ; asso Skr. a9ra * corner* ; assavo Skr. asrava * dis-
charge * ; but 8iri Skr. 9ri * fortune,' with svarabhakti.
25) For /i + r, cp. hiri Skr. hrl * shame' ; ahirikd Skr. ahrl
* shamelessness * ; rasso Skr. hrasva ' short ' ; rahado Skr.
hrada * a pool.'
26) / is assimilated before gutturals and labials.
phaggu Skr. phalgu * reddish.'
appo Skr. alpa * little ' ; kappo Skr. kalpa * period of time ' ;
jappo Skr. jalpa ' word, speech * ; goppho Skr. gulpha * ancle.*
27) Through metathesis gumbo Skr. gulma * thicket ' ;
simbali Skr. ctilmali * cotton-tree.*
28) For /+ V cp. kibbisam Skr. kilvisha * fault * ; billo, but
also beluvo Skr. bilva and bailava * the vilva-tree ' ; khallato
Skr. khalvata ' bald ' ; pallalam Skr. palvala ' small tank.'
29) / after gutturals shows svarabhakti in kileso Skr. kle9a
* sin * ; kilissati Skr. ■v/kli9 * to suffer * ; kilomakam Skr.
kloman * right lung ' ; kilamati Skr. V^lara * to be tired ' ;
gildno Skr. glana ' faded ' ; and from this an abstract
gelanmm is formed, see § 9. akildsu Skr. aglasnu ' healthy.*
Without svarabhakti kleso ' sin.'
30) For / after labials cp.
pilavo Skr. plava ' a kind of duck ' ; pihakam Skr. pllhan
* spleen * ; piluvati and plavati Skr. y/^\\x ' to float * ; plavo
Skr. plava * a raft.*
ambilo Skr. amla 'sour*; milakkho Skr. mleccha 'stranger.*
31) After r, / is assimilated in dullabho Skr. durlabha.
32) For I after sibilants cp.
siloko Skr. 9loka ' stanza ' ; sileaumo semho Skr. 9leshman
' phlegm ' ; silittho Skr. 9lishta * adhering * ; sildgha Skr.
9lagha * praise ' ; asilesd Skr. a9le8ha ' name of a lunar
mansion.*
33) For h + l cp. hilddati, hilddo, hilito Skr. ^lilad 'to
be glad.*
.2
18 PALI GRAMMAR.
34) r, in conjunction with gutturals in the middle of a
word is assimilated : thus pnkko Skr. pakva 'cooked.' In the
beginning of a word, kathito Skr. y^kvath ' boiled.*
35) For V after palatals op. jaldti * to blaze,' and the
intensive daddallati Skr. jajvalyati.
36) V after cerebral: kinnam Skr. kinva ' yeast.'
37) t? AFTER DENTALS.
1) t-\-V'. tvam, tiivam, tarn Skr. tvam 'thou'; tarati Skr.
■v/tvar ; taco Skr. tvac 'skin, bark.' In cattdro Skr. catvaras
* four,' and in ittaro Skr. itvara * going,' we have assimila-
tion. In caccaro Skr. catvara *a court' v was changed into
p, which then palatalized the t. The gerundial suffixes
ivdna and tra are mostly preserved, but sometimes hdna
is contracted into tuna. IriMjo Skr. rtvij 'an officiating
priest.'
2) d-\-v'. dlpo Skr. dvlpa 'an island'; doso Skr. dvesha
'hatred'; saddalo Skr. 9advala 'grassy.' For Skr. dvi, as
separate numeral, the forms dve and duve occur ; in com-
position, however, dvi^ di, du and hd : bdrasa Skr. dvada9an
* twelve ' ; hdvlsati Skr. dvavim9ati.
3) dh-\-v=dh: dhajo Skr. dhvaja 'flag'; dhamseti corre-
sponds to Skr. -v/dhvams * to fall, to perish,' and in composition
uddhamseii ; dhani Skr. dhvani * sound ' ; addhd Skr. adhvan
'path.'
38) V after sibilants is mostly assimilated :
asso Skr. a9va ' horse ' ; bhassaro Skr. bhasvara * brilliant.'
In the beginning of a word 8V is sometimes preserved. We
find also svarabhakti and assimilation, sdmi and suvdml Skr.
svamin * lord.* sd Skr. 9 van ' dog,' has the following forms
besides : aono, suno, sdno, svdno and snvdno. svannam and
Borpiam correspond to Skr. svarna ' gold.' saggo Skr. svarga
' heaven, paradise,* but the adjective soraggiko. are, sure Skr.
9vas ' yesterday ' ; soithi and suratthi Skr. svasti 'health.*
39) Through metathesis h-^v has become rh in jirhd Skr.
jihva ' tongue ' ; savhayo Skr. sahvya ' called, named.*
gahhharatn Skr. gahvara ' cavern.'
40) Sibilants in conjunction with the surd letters.
Following or preceding the surds, the sibilants are always
SIBILANTS. 19
assimilated ; mostly an aspiration of this combination takes
place.
Skr. ksh becomes kkh and cch ; some of the words exhibit
both forms. Skr. shk and %\.=-kkh.
1) cakkhu Skr. cakshus 'eye'; Rakkhaso Skr. Eakshasa;
riikkJio Skr. vrksha * tree ' ; hhikkhu Skr. bhikshu ' a mendi-
cant'; khalati Skr. v/skhal *to tumble'; khandho Skr. skandha
* shoulder ' ; khattiyo Skr. kshatriya * member of the second
caste ' ; khayo Skr. kshaya * decay ' ; khipati Skr, Vkshlv
* to spit.*
2) kacchd Skr. kaksha * a girdle ' ; kitcchi Skr. kukshi
* belly ' ; chamd Skr. kshama * earth.'
3) akkhi acchi Skr. akshi * eye ' ; ikko, accho, and with a
singular assimilation iso and isso Skr. rksha * bear ' ; khuddo
chuddho Skr. kshudra 'small'; chano khano Skr. kshana
* moment, a festive time ' ; pakkho paccho Skr. paksha
* a wing ' ; khuro Skr. kshura * razor ' ; cullo, culo, culo Skr.
kshuUa * small ' ; sakkato Skr. samskrta ' Sanskrit ' ; nikko
Skr. nishka ' a golden ornament ' ; nikkeso Skr. nishke^a
* bald.'
4) Skr. 9C=ecA: acchariyo Skr. accarya * wonderful ';/)accAd
Skr. paccat ' behind ' ; vicchiko Skr. vr9cika ' a scorpion ' ;
nicchinati Skr. ni8+ Vci 'to ascertain.'
5) t% and ps become alike cch.
hibhaccho Skr. bibhatsa * loathsome * ; cikicckati tikicchati
Skr. cikitsati * to cure ' ; dicchati Skr. ditsati (desid. to
Vda) ; macchari Skr. matsarin * selfish.'
acchard Skr. apsaras ' a nymph ' ; lacchati Skr. lipsati
(desid. to v/labh).
6) 8htshth = tth: ^(//Aa^i Skr. tishthati 'to stand'; yittho Skr.
ishtk P.P.P. to Vyaj 'to sacrifice'; attha Skr. ash tan 'eight' ;
chattho Skr. shashtha ' sixth * ; hhattJio Skr. bhrashta * fallen ' ;
mattho and matto Skr. mrshta ' polished ' ; hhattho and hhatto
Skr. bhrshta' fried.'
7) leddu * a clod of earth,' is supposed to stand for Skr.
loshta. The modem vernaculars, however, show the forms
lendu and leddu.
8) Skr. st and sth are generally represented by tth. This
20 PALI GRAMMAR.
may optionally be cerebralized. atthi Skr. asthi 'bone*;
atthi Skr. asti *to be'; hatthl Skr. hastin 'elephant/ and
without aspiration atto Skr. asta * thrown.*
9) In the beginning of a word cp. thakanam Skr. sthagana
* covering ' ; thamhho Skr. starabho ; thdnam Skr. sthana
' standing,' and other derivatives from Vsthji with cerebrali-
zation ; thero Skr. sthavira * priest ' ; ihupo Skr. stQpa
* a tope * ; thcvo and chevo * a drop,* to Skr. ^/stip, and
perhaps chamhhati Skr. \/stambh * to amaze ' ; khdnu Skr.
sthiinu ' stump of a tree.*
10) In conjunction with the labials the sibilants are assimi-
lated ; sometimes an aspiration takes place. The characters
for /), ph being very much alike in Siamese, Burmese and
Sinhalese MSS., it is very difficult to say if this is more than
graphic.
11) phasso Skr. spar^a 'touch'; phusati Skr. y/^VT9 '^
touch' ; puppliam Skr. pushpa 'flower'; by the side of pupphiio
a form phitssito occurs, both going back to Skr. pushpita
'flowering.'
12) happo Skr. vashpa * a tear ' ; apphotd Skr. asphota
'jasmine'; nippapo Skr. nishpapa 'free from sin'; nippaco
Skr. nishpava * winnowing, clearing * ; mpphddanam * ac-
complishment,* to nipajjati Skr. nis+Vpad; nij^phalo Skr.
nishphala * fruitless.'
41) Groups of nasals with sibilants following are treated in
difierent ways : 1) The group is preserved intact ; 2) be-
tween the sibilant and the nasal a vowel is inserted ; 3) the
sibilant is changed to A, and metathesis takes place. In the
beginning of a word assimilation may take place.
In several instances a word appears under more than one form.
1) sineho sneho Skr. sneha ' friendship ' ; nisneho * without
love * ; sindnam nahdnam Skr. sniina ' bathing ' ; siniddho
niddho Skr. snigdha * oily ' ; snnhd smiim husd Skr. snushu
' sister-in-law ' ; Sineru Neru Mem Sumeru probably belong
together, and point to a form Sneru.
2) panhi Skr. pr9ni ' variegated ' ; pmiho Skr. pra9na
' question ' ; tajihd tasind Skr. trshna * lust ' ; kanho kasino
Skr. krshna ' black ' ; unho Skr. ushna ' hot.'
SANDHI. 21
3) aitam mihitam Skr. smita * smile ' ; massu Skr. 9ma9ru
* beard ' ; gimho Skr. grishma ' summer ' ; asmd am/id Skr.
agman 'stone'; semho silesumo Skr. gleshman 'phlegm'; rasmi
ramsi Skr. ra9rai * a ray of light ' ; ramsimd Skr. ra9mimat
* radiant ' ; apamdro apasmdro Skr. apasmara * epilepsy.'
4) In the oblique case of the pronoun sm is optionally
changed into mh, and thus also in the form of the^ verb,
subst. anihi asmi amlie asme.
42) In combination with nasals, h shows svarabhakti or
metathesis.
ganhati Skr. grhnati ' to grasp ' ; hanute hnute Skr. hnute
'to conceal oneself' ; cihanam cinham Skr. cihnana 'mark,
sign * ; jimho Skr. jihma * crooked.'
43) Groups of three or more consonants are treated like
those consisting only of two. Assimilation takes place, in
some instances svarabhakti.
uddham uhhham Skr. urdhvam ' upwards.' The repre-
sentation is, of course, due to the different assimilation which
took place ; just as in disvd, and less frequently datt/iu, for
Skr. drshtva v'dr9; uddhumdyati (pass.) Skr. ud+\/<ihma 'to
be blown up ' ; tikkino tikklio tinho Skr. tikshna * sharp ' ;
sanho Skr. 9lak8hna * smooth ' ; jiinhd dosino Skr. jyotsna
' moonlight ' ; kasino Skr. krtsna * entire ' ; satti Skr. 9astri
'knife'; idattat/am=.idam-\-frai/a; lacchati Skr. lapsyati fut. to
\/lahh ; checchati fut. to chindati Skr. -v/chid * to cut ' ; macco
Skr. martya ' mortal ' ; maccho Skr. matsya ' fish ' ; alio Skr.
adra 'wet'; vatumam vattam Skr. vartman; itthi itthi thl Skr.
strl ' woman.'
44) Three consonants are only allowed in conjunction with
the semivowels.
§ 15. SANDHI.1
In the preceding paragraphs the phonetic changes which
take place in the midst of a word have been considered.
It remains now to be seen what changes take place in the
> Cpr. On Sandhi in Pall by the late R. C. Childen, Journal Royal Asiatic
Society, 1879.
22 PALI GRAMMAR.
sentence. None of the Sandhi rules known from Sanskrit
grammar as imperative are so in Pali. We have of course
only to deal with external Sandhi in Pali, as internal Sandhi
has been treated under the heading of phonetic changes, to
which it properly belongs.
In prose the MSS. differ greatly in the use of Sandhi, and
whilst, for instance, Burmese and Siamese MSS. prefer
writing khvdham, the Singhalese MSS. separate the words
into kho aham. In verse Sandhi of course takes place
according to the exigencies of the metre. Later texts, such
as ""the Dipavamsa, take great liberties, omitting whole
syllables, etc.
The following tables will show the most frequent changes
that occur : —
VOWEL SANDHI.
VOWELS IN COMBINATION VHTH VOWELS.
a+a=:id'. ndhosi=na ahosi.
a+a+coNjUNCT coNSONANT=a : na 'tthi=na atthi; pana
annam=:pan' annam.
flf4-fl+ CONJUNCT CONSONANT =d : ndssa=na assa.
a before a is rarely elided. Such elision generally takes
place before aham * 1/ ai/am * this,' and the forms of the
verb atthi * to be.*
d-\-h=d: taddyam=tadd ayam ; iaddsi=tadd dai.
d-{-i=:e: bandhuss 'eva=.bandhussa ica.
d + ^ = 0 : nopetizn na upeti.
a + iti=. d : Tissdti vacancna = Tissa Hi.
a-\-piz=. dpi : ajjdpi = ajja.
d + M=u : cubhayam-=.ca ubhayam ; tadup(f = tadd upa-
sammanti.
a-{-i=d (elision of i): yena *me=yena ime. This elision
seems only to take place in case of the pronoun idam.
a+t or M=» or w (elision of a) : pahdy* imam=pahdya imam ;
tatr' idam-=tat)'a idam; yass* indriydnznyassa indriydnii; ten*
upa8ankami= fena upasahkami.
VOWEL 8ANDHI. 23
a is elided before d u e o: yen* di/asmd ; uithdi/* dsand ; idh*
dcuso; eken* uno-=.ekena um\ netv' ekamantikam \ o* etarahi
tass' okdsam.
d sometimes elides a short vowel, and less often a long
vowel other than d : disvd 'panissayam for diavd upan° ; sided
*va for sutvd eva.
d is often elided before a long vowel or a short followed
by a conjunct consonant : tath' eva=.tathd\ netv* ekamantikam
eva=neti'd ek°.
d-|-i=e in seyyathldam=.seyyathd idam and saddhidhdzs,
saddhd idhd.
% is elided before short or long vowels : gacchdm* aham
gacchdmi a° ; p' ajja=-pi ajja ; dasah' upagatam-=dasahi upa°.
i is elided in timh' a^sa=.tmihi assa.
«+t=l: in combinations with iti: samanUdha=.8amantiidha.
i-\-a=.a : kihcdp)i=.kinci api (more frequently kiticid apt).
i preceded by t or tt and followed by a vowel becomes fy:
jlcanty elaka ; ty ayam ti ayam. The examples are from
late Pali works, and are perhaps doubtful.
itl-\-ecam: ity evam, but also according to the rules after
which iy h palatalized ice evam, and thus di=jj ; api=app,
etc., as pointed out above, § 14, and ifv evam.
u is elided before a vowel: samef dyasmd=sametu d°; sadh*
dvuso=-sadhu° \ tusites' upapajjat/iaz=tusitesu upa°.
u-\-i=.u~^ sadhuti=.sadhu iti; kitnsudha=-kimsu-\-idha.
5efore a vowel changes into v. The examples are
doubtful : vatthv* eva-=vatthu eva.
e may be elided before a long vowel: w' d8i=me dsi; stlavant*
ettha-=.sllavanto ettha.
e sometimes elides a following vowel: te 'me=^te ime; sace
'jja=ajj'a.
e+a=.d : sacdham = sace + ahaip .
e-\ra=jyi the a being lengthened: tydham=.te aham. After
louWe consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily.
0 often elides a following vowel: so '/iam=.so aham ; pattiko
*vaz=°eva; kattahbo' posathe=.k° upo°.
0 is elided before a vowel : kuV eUha=kufo ettha \ katam'
assa^^katamo assa.
24 PALI GRAMMAR.
o+a=d: duJikhAyam—dukkho ayam.
o+a=r, the a being lengthened: 8vdham=-80 afiam; khvd'
ham=.kho aham. After a double consonant lengthening takes
place arbitrarily.
0 becomes v before a long vowel.
§ 16. EUPHONIC CHANGES.
1) If a word ending in d, is followed by idam, or one of its
oblique cases, y is inserted : na yklam, na-y-iinassa.
2) iva after words ending in vowels or nasal vowels
becomes viya sometimes : e.g. kim v'uja like what.
3) V is inserted if a vowel is followed by u or u.
4) eva becomes yeva after words ending in vowels or nasal
vowels.
6) m is inserted between two vowels : idha-m dhu:=idha
dhu; jeyya-m attdnam=jeyya atf\ idha-m-ijjhati, giri-m-iva.
6) r is inserted when a word ending in a vowel is followed
by a word commencing with a vowel: dhiratthu and vijjur eva.
7) d\a inserted in sammad eva, anvad eva, satthud anvayo.
These consonants have been inserted according
to false analogy.
8) A few instances occur of the original consonant reappear-
ing which, according to the phonetic rules in Pali
should be omitted.
manasdd atmavimxittdnam-=mana8d° \ yasmdd apeti (and so
in Sanskrit) ; tasmdd eva=ta8md; kenacid eva; ahud eva (Skr.
abhud eva) ; puthag eva (Skr. prthag eva) ; pageva (Skr.
prageva) ; tunhltn dslnam (Skr. tushnim) ; vuttir esd (Skr.
vrttir esha) ; sahhhir eva (Skr. sadbhir eva) ; pathavi dhdtur
eva=dhdtu eva (Skr. dhiitur eva) ; punar eva=puna eva (Skr.
punar eva) ; hhattur atthe=hhattu atthe (Skr. bhartur arthe) ;
chal eva (Skr. shad eva).
9) The niooahTta stands sometimes for an original final
consonant. This can be replaced by an original consonant
before vowels : sakim stands for Skr. sakrt, and before eva it
becomes aakid eva, in accordance with Sanskrit.
10) The same is the case with tarn yam etam, which stand
/
DECLENSION. 26
for tad yad etad respectively, and appear in this shape before
vowels : tad eva ; etad avoca.
11) Owing to false analogy, wrong consonants sometimes
appear by the side of the right : punam eva for punar, artnad
atthu for annam, hahud eva for hahur.
12) Original double consonants which are assimilated are
sometimes after vowels doubled.
13) In verse the niggahTta is elided before a consonant :
no ce muhceyya candimam for munceyyam ; maccdna jlvitam
for maccdnam ; etam huddhdna sdsanam for buddhdnam sds°.
14) Sometimes the nasal vowel 4*«ntirely elided : im* etam
z=.imam etamy^mpajf aham =. nipajjim aham,
am-\-a=a: ekam iddham samayam; ekam idam aham;
evdyam=evam ay am.
15) If a word ends in niggahTta and a consonant follows,
it may be changed to the nasal of that class to which the con-
sonant belongs: tn-\-k-=nk, m-\-c:=nc, m=^tz=nt, m-\-t=-nt,
m-\-p'=^mp.
16) A word ending in the niggahTta, followed by a word
beginning with y, becomes nn : tarn yeva=.tanneva ; dnantari-
kannam.
17) The niggahTta before h optionally becomes n : evanhi.
§ 17. DECLENSION.
1) We have drawn attention in the chapter on Phonetics
to the fact that Pali only allows vowels and nasalized vowels
at the end of a word. Through this law the shape of a word
is considerably altered. Roughly speaking, vowels are either
substituted at the end of a word, or those consonants which
would impede the action of this law are dropped. A con-
sequence of this process is, that, although the essential
features of the various Sanskrit declensions are preserved,
no declension has kept within its proper range.
2) The nominative case as a prototype case has influenced
the other cases, and since stems e.g. ending in as or a alike
26 PALI GRAMMAR.
form the nominative case in o, the as and a declension follow
respectively the analogy of the as or o declension.
3) Besides this the influence of the declension of the
pronouns on the declension of nouns has to be noticed,
and vice vend.
4) Pali distinguishes three genders : masculine, feminine
and neuter, two numbers singular and plural, and, including
the vocative, eight cases. In the declension of neuter nouns
and of pronouns some traces of an old dual are to be found,
which will be noticed hereafter ; but practically speaking
the dual is extinct.
5) The Piili grammarians recognize six case relations,
which by their name indicate the functions of the cases.
The nominative and vocative cases are of course omitted in
this enumeration.
6) The nominative case is simply called the first case
(pathamd). It simply expresses the subject. It is sometimes
used instead of the vocative, which latter is called the
alapanam * the addressing case.*
7) The names given respectively to the other cases to
show their relation {karakam) are :
kammam accusative.
karanam instrumental.
sampaddnam dative.
apdddnam ablative.
sdmi genitive.
okdso or ddhdro locative.
Other terms are : for the accusative upai/ogo, for the ablative
nissakko, and for the locative hhummo.
USES OF THE CASES.
I) The relation of the Accusative (kammam). The
accusative is used as the case of the direct object of a
transitive verb. The transitive verba have a somewhat
wider range in all the Indian languages than in the related
ones, and so we find an accusative as the goal of motion
USES OF THE CASES. 27
with verbs of * going/ * bringing,* * sending/ etc. Vihdram
gantid * having gone to the monastery/
Verbs of €peaking may follow the same rule. Tarn rdjd
idam abruii ' the king said this to him.*
The accusative is further used to denote space traversed
and duration of time. Patindsa yajandni gacchati ' he marches
fifty yojanas.*
It is used with verbs signifying to have recourse, to appear,
to ask. Buddham saranam gacchdmi ' I take my refuge in
the Buddha.*
Causative verbs have a double accusative. Updsakam mam
hhavam Gotamo dhdretu 'let the lord Gotama receive me as
a disciple.*
The accusative is used with the following prepositions :
pati : Sangamam pati pihd * longing for union.*
pari : rukkham pari * in the direction of the tree.*
anu : arm Sdriputtam pannavd hhikkhu * a priest
inferior to S. in learning.*
anto,antara: antara vUhim olokayamdno 'looking down into
the street.'
abhi abhito: abhito gdmam 'round the village.'
tiro : tiro bhdvam gacchati * he goes out of sight.*
II) The relation of the Instrumental (karanam).
The instrumental denotes adjacency, accompaniment,
association, and of course, instrumentality. All the uses
of this case may be derived from its original meaning.
We notice particularly the use made of the instrumental
to denote 1) equality, likeness, accordance, default :
Rdgena samo aggi ndma natthi * there is no fire like lust/
akkhind kdno * blind of one eye.*
2) the space traversed and duration of time :
nabhasd gacchati ' he goes through air.'
3) the construction of a passive verb or participle :
evam me mtam ' thus it was heard by me.'
4) the prepositions aaha saddhim vind, though generally used
with the instrumental, are also found with other cases :
Saha gabbhena jiiitakkhayam pdpunissdmi ' I shall perish
together with my unborn child * ; Mahatd bhikkhu'Sahg/ieiia
28 PALI GRAMMAR.
saddhim * with a great company of priests ' ; vind dosena
* without any fault.*
Ill) The relation of the Dative (sampaddnam) [effect-
ing case]. The case of the indirect object. It is used to
denote objects * to, towards, for, at, against,' which, anything
is done or intended.
It is used, therefore, with words signifying
1) give, share out, and assign : Maggam dehi rahno ' make
room for the king.'
2) Show, announce, declare : tasaa abruvi ' said to him * ;
tut/ham avikaromi * I will explain thee.*
3) Give attention, have a regard or feeling, inclination,
obeisance : Bhavato bhaddam hotu ' may good happen to the
lord.*
4) In an infinitive sense : lokdnukampdya ' out of pity to
the world.'
lY) The ablative relation (apdddnam). The 'from'
case. It is used to denote removal, distinction, separation,
issue, deprival, restraint: mdtito sudd/io '.pure on the mother's
side ; ' avijfd paccayd sahkhdrd.
As special applications, we notice
1) the ablative after words expressing fear in interchange
with the genitive : Sahbe bhdyanti maccuno or maccund ' all
fear death.'
2) the ablative of distinction: yato panitataro id vaaitthataro
vd natthi 'than whom there is none better or more ac-
complished.' Also in interchange with the genitive and
instrumental.
The ablative is used with the prepositions and adverbs
implying the notion of distance, removal, such as dra * far
off'; purd * formerly,' which are ablatives according to their
formation : drd so dsavakkhayd * he is far from the extinction
of passion* ; t<u%a dgamand purd * before his arriving.*
V) The genitive relation [sdmi]. The case relation is
an adjectival one, out of which all other uses arise.
It is to a great extent interchangeable with IV) the
locative [okd8o]y the * in' case.
Thus we find a locative and genitive absolutely employed :
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 29
rudato ddrakassa or rudantasmim darake ' whilst the child
was crying ' ; Evam vutfe ' having said thus.'
In connection with verbs and substantives denoting either
possession or dominion, either the genitive or locative is used.
The locative is used interchangeably with the accusative,
instrumental, dative, and ablative.
Among prepositional uses of the locative we notice upa and
adhi having respectively the sense of inferior and superior to.
Upa khdriyam dono ' a drona is inferior to a kharl ' ; adhi
devesu Buddho * Buddha is superior to the gods.*
In interchange with the instrumental, the locative is used ,
with adjectives of the sense of satisfied, eager, zealous.
I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
"We shall now give the paradigms for the different
declensions, of which we make two divisions.
I. Stems in vowels.
II. Stems in consonants.
We shall mark those forms which belong to the pro-
nominal declension with f, those which are taken from
another declension with *, obsolete forms with :{:.
STEMS IN YOWELS.
Masculine and Neuters in a.
Dhamma.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. dhammo dhamma J dhammase
Voc. dhamma dhammd dhamma
Ace. dhammam dhamme
Instr. dhammena vinaycL dhammehhi dhammehi
Dat. dhamtndya * dhammassa dhammdnam
Abl. dhammd fdhammasmd
t dhammamhd dhamynebhi dhammehi
Gen. dhammassa dhammdnam
Loc. dhamme f dhammasmhn
fdhammamhi dhammcsu
\
30
PALI GRAMMAR.
Neuters in a.
Citta.
8IM0VLAB.
PI.UBAL.
Nom.
\
cittdni X ^i^^^ * citte
Voc.
cittam
cittdni
Ace.
)
cittani X ^^^^^
Instr,
citiena
cittehhi cittehi
Dat.
dttdya cittasm
cittdnam
Abl.
cittd t ciltasma t cittamha
cittehhi cittehi
Gen.
cittassa
cittdnam
Loc.
citte t cittasmim cittamhi
ciftesu
The forms of this declension correspond more to those of
Vedic Sanskrit than those of classical Sanskrit.
Cp. instr. sing. yajTid ; pi. nom. devdsas ; pi. nom. neut.
pugd; pi. instr. devebhis. Is the form citte an old dual neuter?
Feminine Stems in a.
Kamid
.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom. kanfid
kamid * kanhdyo
Voc. kufine
kamid * kamidyo
Ace. hahnam
kamid * kamidyo
Instr. hamidya
kamidhhi kamidhi
Dat. kamidya
kamidnam
Abl. kauhdya
kamidbhi kanndhi
Gen. kamidya
kamidnam
Loc. kamidyam
* kamidya
kahhdm
The voc. sing, of
ammd 'mother' is given as amma and
ammd.
Masculines
in *.
Aggi.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nora, aggi
aggayo aggiyo * aggi
Voc. aggi
aggayo aggiyo aggi
Ace. aggim
aggi * aggayo * aggiyo
Instr. aggind
agglhhi aggihi
Dat.
aggino ^aggtssa
agglnam
STEMS IN VOWELS.
31
SIN'OVLAB.
Ahl. * oggind faggimhd f aggismd aggibhi agglhi
Gen. * aggino * aggissa agglnam
Loc. aggini faggimhi ■faggismim agglsu
The voc. sing, of isi * a sage ' occurs as u€y corresponding
to Sanskrit rshe.
From muni *a recluse' the loc. sing, occurs as mune.
Of ddi ' starting-point ' the following locative sing, forms
occur :
ado, ddu corresponding both to Skr. adau, * ddim f ddiinhi
f ddismim.
The neuters in i follow the declension of those in in. As
paradigm aithi * a bone ' will be given.
Feminines in I.
Ratti.
SINOTTLAB.
Nom.
ratti
Voc.
ratti
Ace.
rattim
Instr.
rattiyd
Dat.
rattiyd
Abl.
rattiyd
Gen.
rattiyd
Loc.
rattiyam
\ * rattiyd
* ratti
* ratti
*
rattlyo
raiilhi
PLinEUL.
rattlyo
rattlyo
ratti
rattibhi
rattlnam
rattibhi
rattlnam
%ratto rattim
Instead of the forms of the instr. sing, in iyd, yd occurs,
corresponding to Sanskrit. This unites with the preceding
consonant, and palatalizes the same arbitrarily ;
matyd santyd for matiyd santiyd
jaccd najjd for Jdtiya nadiyd
A palatalization occurs in conjunction with other forms.
The paradigm of nadt ' river * will show the declension.
Nom. nadi
Voc. nadl
Ace. nadim
Instr. nadiyd nadyd najjd
nadiyo * najjo * nadl
nadiyo * najjo * nadi
nadi * nadiyo J naj/e.
nadihhi nadihi * najjo
32
PALI GRAMMAR.
Dat.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc.
SINGULAR.
nadiyd nadyd
najja
PLIRAL.
nadlnam
nadlhhi nadihi
nadlnam
nadlsu
nadiyani nadiyd najjam
The loc. sing, of Bdmmsl is given as Bdrdnasim.
itthi, thl * a woman/ corresponding to Skr. strl, shows the
following forms :
SINGULAR.
Nom. itthi
Voc.
Ace.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc.
itihl
itthim
itthiyd
itthiyd
itthiyd
itthiyd
itthiyam
thl itthlyo
thl itthlyo
itthiyam itthi
thiyam itthlbhi
thiyam itthinam
thiyam itthlbhi
thiyam itthinam
itthiyd itthlsu
Declension in u.
Bhikkhu.
PLURAL.
thiyo
thiyo
* itthlyo
itthlhi
thlnam
itthlhi
thlnam
thlsu
* itthi
* itthi
Nom.
Yoc.
Ace.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
SINGULAR.
bhikkhu
bhikkhu
bhikkhiim
bhikkhund
* bhikkhuno
bhikkhuno
bhikkhavo * bhikkhu
bhikkhavo bhikkhave
* bhikkhu
bhikkhu * bhikkhavo
bhikkhuhi bhikkhubhi
bhikkhunam
bhikkhubhi bhikkhuhi
* bhikkhussa
t bhikkhusmd
t bhikkhumhd
Gen. bhikkhuno * bhikkhussa bhikkhunam
Loc. t bhikkhusmim f bhikkhumhi bhikkhusu bhikkhusu
We have in adverbial use the gen. sing, heto and hetu from
hetu.
The influence of other declensions we find in such forms as
nom, plur. oi jantu and hetu : jantuyo jantuno, hctuyo hetuno.
Masculines in u agree with those in m, showing the long u
in the nom. voc. ace. plur. In those forms we have also
formations according to other declensions, e.g. :
sabbatmu : sabbammno
abhibhu : abhibhuvo abhibhuno
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
33
Neuters in u form their nom. ace. plur. either in u or uni.
The form of the aco. sing, in m is also used for the nomi-
native.
Feminines in &.
Jamhu.
8INOULAB.
PLCRAL.
Nom.
jamhA
jamhhjo * jamhu
Voc.
Jamhu
jamhAyo * jamhu
Ace.
jamhiim
jamhu *jamhuyo
Instr.
jamhuyd
jamhuhhi jamhuhi
Dat.
jambuya
jamhunam
Abl.
jamhuyd
jamhuhhi jamhuhi
Gen.
jamhuyd
jamhunam
Loc.
jamhuyam jamhuyd
jamhum
The loe. of bhu is hhuvi adverbially used.
Of crude forms ending in Sanskrit in diphthongs we find
only go ' a cow.'
SINOULAB.
Nom. go
Voc. go
Ace. gam *gavam *gavum *gdvam
Instr. X ga id * gd vena
Dat. gdvassa
Abl. gdvd fgdi'asmd fgdvamha
Gen. *gdvassa
Loe. gdve fgdvamhi fgdvasmim
The influence of the ace. sing,
of the diphthongal conjugation in other declensions, e.g. ace.
sing. Skr. niyam from rai, Pali rdyo * wealth ' ; ace. sing.
Skr. navam from nau, Pali ndvd * a ship.'
PLURAL.
gdvo
gdro
*gdvo
gobhi gohi
gavam *gunnam *gonam
gobhi gohi
gavam *giinnam *gonam
gosu *gdvesu
has effected a transition
II. STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
Stems in ar, Skr. r.
Satthd * teacher.'
8IK0VLAR. PLURAL.
Nom.
mtthd satthdro
Voc.
satthd sattha satthdro
34 TALI GRAMMAR.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Acc. aatthdram satthare *8atthd.ro
Instr. aatthard * satthund * aatthdrd satthdrebhi satthdrehi
Dat. safthtt * satthmsa satthanam * satthdnam
* satthuno * mtthdrdnam
Abl. sat (hard mtthdrd sattharehhi * satthdrebhi
Gen. satthu satthiissa aatthatiam * satthdrdnam
* satthdnam
Loc. satthari sattharesu *satthdresu
With the declension of satthd, that of pita nearly agrees.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. pita pitaro
Voc. pitd pita pitaro
Acc. pitaram pitare * pitaro
Instr. pitard *pitund pituhhi *pituhi pitarehhi
Dat. pitu *pitu8sa *pituno pitunnam pitHnam pitdnam
*pitardnam
pituhhi *pituhi *pitarehhi
*pitareh,i
pitunnam pitunam pitdnam
*pitardnam
pitusu *pitusu *pitare8u
Abl.
pitu *pitard
Gen.
pitu *pitu8sa *pituno
Loc.
pitari
Mdtd
SINGULAR.
Nom.
mdtd
Voc.
mdta *mdtd
Acc.
mdtaram
PLURAL.
mdtaro
mdtaro
mdtare * mdtaro
Instr. mdtard*mdtuya*mdtyd mdtubhi *matubhi *mdtarehhi
Dat. mdtu *mdtuya * mat yd mdtunam *mdtunam mdtdnam
* mdtardnam
Abl. mdtard*mdtuyd*matyd mdtubhi * mdtubhi *mdtarebhi
Gen. mdtu *mdtuyd *matyd mdtunam * mdtunam mdtdnam
* mdtardnam
Loc. mdtari * mdtuyarn mdt- mdtusu * mdtmu * mdtdresu
yam *mdtuyd *mdtyd
As an appendix to the declension in ar, it will perhaps be
best to give the declension of aakhd * a friend.'
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
35
The word corresponds to the Skr. sakhi, which shows an
irregular declension. The same irregularities we find also in
Piili, and besides this we find the influence of other de-
clensions. The forms are not marked.
SCrOULAK.
Nom. sakhd
Voc. sakhe sakhi sakhl sakhd sakha
Ace. sakhdram sakhdyam sakhdnam sakham
Instr. sakhind
Dat. sakhissa sakhino
Abl. sakhind
Gen. sakhissa sakhino
Loc. sakhe
Nom. sakhdyo sakhino
Voc. sakhdyo sakhino
Ace. sakhl sakhino
sakhdno
sakhdno
sakhdyo sakhdno
Instr. sakharehi sakhdrehhi sakhehi
Dat. sakhinam sakhdrdnam
Abl. sakharehi sakhdrehhi sakhehi
Gen. sakhardnflm sakhdrdnam sakhinam
Loc. sakkhdresu sakkhesu
II. Stems in Nasals.
1) in an.
Atfan 'self.'
SmOULAR.
ThVVJiL.
Nom.
attd
attdno
Voc.
atta *attd
attdno
Ace.
attdnam *attanam *attam
attano
* attdno
Instr.
attand * attena
*attanebhi
*attebhi
Dat.
attano
attanam
* attdnam
Abl.
attand fattasmd
*attanehhi
*attebhi
Gen.
attano
attanam
* attdnam
Loc. attani fattasmim attamhi attanesu
36
PALI GRAMMAR.
The form tltumd is of comparatively rare occurrence. We
find : Ace. sing, dtumdnam
Nom. ace. plur. dtum&no
Gen. and dat. plur. dtumdnam.
Brahman.
BlNOfLAJ
I.
PLIHAI,.
Nom.
brahmd
hrahmdno
Voc.
hrahme
hrnhmdno
Ace.
hrahmdnam
* hrahmam
hrahmano * hrahmdno
Instr.
hrahmttnd
hrahmand
* hrahmehhi
Dat.
hrahmuno
* hrahmassa
hrahmunam * hrahmdnam
Abl.
hrahmund
hrahmand
hrahmehhi
t hrahmasmd
Gen.
hrahmuno
* hrahmassa
hrahmunam * hrahmdnam
Loc.
hrahmuni
hrahmam
* hrahmesu
•\hrahmasmim
Rdjan * king.*
BINOrLAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
rdjd
•
rdjd no
Voc.
raja * rdjd
rdjdno
Ace.
rdjdnam *rdjam
rdjano * rdjdno
Instr.
rahhd rdjina *rdjena
rdjubld *rdjuhhi *rdjehhi
Dat.
rarim rdjino *rdja8sa
ramam rdjunam * rdjdnam
Abl.
rawid t rdjamha
rdjuhhi *rdjuhhi *rdjehhi
Gen.
ranno rdjino rq/assa
rafiiiafn rcyunam * rdjdnam
Loc.
rdjini rantii *ranm
rq/usu *rdjusu *rqfe8U
Yucan 'young.'
SIXGVI.AU.
Nom.
yard
Voc.
yuva
yuvd
*yurdna *yuvdnd
Ace.
yuednatn
* yucam
Instr.
Xyund
*yuvdnd
* yuvena * yuvanena
Dat.
tyuno
*yuvdna.'isa
*yuvassa
Abl.
Xyuno
*yucdnd
fyuvanasma
Gen.
ty&no
*yutas8a
*yuvdna88a
Loc.
yuve
yuci
fyuvamhi fyuvasmim
j/urdne
fyuranasnn'm
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
37
PLGRAI.
Nom
1. yuvdno
* yuvdnd
Voc.
yuvdnd
Ace.
yuve
*yuvdne
* yuvdnd
Instr. yuvdnehi
yuvehi
Dat.
yuvdndnam
yuvdnam
Abl.
yuvdnehi
yuvehi
Gen.
yuvdndnam
yuvdnam
Loc.
yuvdnesu
yuvdsu
yuveau
8d'
dog.'
SINOUT.AR.
PLUHAl.
Nom.
sd
sdno *8d
Voc.
sd
sdno 8d
Ace.
sdnam *sam
aano *8dno
Instr.
sund sand
*send
sdhhi
Dat.
*sdya *sassa
sdnam
Abl.
sd t sasfnd
t samhd
sdhhi
Gen.
*sassa
sdnam
Loc.
se fsasmim \samhi
sdsu
'sa "'se
Besides this, the following forms occur, and are declined
as if belonging to the first declension :
sono mno svdno and suvdno. The fem. is sonl.
Pumd \_puma7i].
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
pumd
pumdno
Voc.
pumam
pumd
pumdno
Ace.
pumdnam
*pumam
pumune pumdno
Instr.
pumund
*pumdnd *pumend
pumdnehi
Dat.
pumuno
*pumassa
pumdnam
Abl.
pumund
pumdnehi
Gen.
pumuno
*pumassa
pumdnam
Loc.
pumane
*pume
pumdsu putnesu
These paradigms have been given to show the way in
which the an stems are treated. We find several instances
where, according to what was said in the introduction, a
38
PALI GRAMMAR.
word has only preserved a few traces of its belonging to this
class.
Besides the regular forms of the a declension of kammam,
we find the instr. sing, kammund kammand, the gen. sing.
kammuno, and the loc. kammani.
In several instances forms of the an declension are in
adverbial use only.
2) Declension of Stems in mant vanf.
SmOULAR UASC. SmOULAB NBTTT.
Nom. gnnavd *gunavanto gunavam
Voc. gunavam *gimard *gunava
Ace. gunavantam * gunavam gunavam
Instr. gunavatd * gwiavantena
Dat. gunavato * gunavantassa gunavassa
Abl. gunavatd
Gen. gunavato
Loc. gunavati
* gunavantassa
*gunavante
gunavassa
f gunavantasfnim -fgum-
vantamhi
Nom. ■)
Y \ gunavanto *gunavantd gunavanti gunavantam
Ace. *gu7iavante gunavanti gunavantdni
Instr. gunavantehhi
Dat. gunavatam
Abl. * gunavantehhi
Gen. gmiavatam
Loc. gunavantesu
The corresponding feminine is made by adding t to either
the strong or weak form : gunavanti or gunavati. It is then
declined like a form l.
* gunavantehi
* gmiavantdnam
* gunavantdnam
The participles in ant are declined like those in mant, with
the exception of the nom. sing, case, which is gaccham or
*gacchanto. Compare further :
Nom. sing, arahd and araham ' venerable.*
„ mahd mahaw * mahanto ' great*
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
San/o P.P. to atf/ii ' to be.'
shows the following forms :
39
SINGULAR.
PLVaAT..
Nona.
santo
santo
Ace.
santam
sante
Instr.
said *santena Instr.
and Abl. sabbhi
*santehi
Gen. and Dat.
sato santassa
satam
Log.
sati
Bhavam.
SINGULAK.
Voc.
bho hhonfa
Ace.
hhatantam hhotani
Instr.
hhavafd bhotd
bhavantena
Gen. and Dat. hhavato hhoto
bhavantassa
Abl.
bhavatd bhotd
PLURAL.
Nom.
bhavanto bhonto
bhavantd
Voc.
bhavanto bhonto
bhante
Ace.
bhavante bhonte
The fern, appears under the forms of :
bhavatl bhavanti bhoti Fern. nom. plur. bhotiyo
3) Stems in in.
In this declension several stems have been combined in
one system.
SINOXTLAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
dandl
dandino
* dan^i
Voc.
dandi
dandino
* dandi
Ace.
dandinam dandim
* dandino
dandi
Instr.
dandind *datidind
dandibhi
* dandibhi
Dat.
dandino *dandlno
* dandissa
dandinam
* dandinam
Abl.
damlind f dandismd f dandimhd
dan/libhi
*dandihi
Gen.
damlino * dandino
* dandissa
dandinam
* dandinam
Loc.
dandini *dandlni
t daiidimhi
dandisH
*dandisu
The short vowel in the
oblique cases of the pli
irul appears
40
PALI GRAMMAR.
optionally in verses; the forms with long vowels are the
more frequent.
Notice nom. plur. d'lpiyo, from dipl *a panther.' [
The word atthi ' a bone/ corresponding to Skr. asthan and
asthi, shows the following forms :
8INOULAB.
PLURAL
Nom.
atthi
* atthim
atthini
atthi
Voc.
atthi
* aft him
atthini
atthi
Ace.
atthi
* atthim
atthini
atthi
Instr.
atthind
atthlbhi
atthlhi
Dat.
* atthino
*atthissa
atthlnatn
Abl.
atthind
f atthi mhd
t atthismd
atthlbhi
atthlhi
Gen.
* atthino
* atthisso
atthlnam
Loc.
atthini
fatthimhi
atthismim
atthlsu
Neuters in as and us.
Mono (manas).
mano
mano
mano
Nom.
Voc.
Ace.
Instr. manasd
Dat. manaso
Abl. manasd
Gen. ma7iaso
Loc. manasi
' manam
* manam
*manasam
* manena
*mana88a
* mand
* manassa
*mane
'manam
•fmanamhd
The pi. follows entirely the declension in a masc. and neut.
From (hdmo 'strength' instr. thdmasd and gen. thdffiaso,
by the side of thdmund and thdniuno respectively ; from tapo
* religious austerity ' instr. fapasd and tapena.
The comparative in po and if/t/o is declined like mano.
Nom. sing. m. f. and n. sei/t/o, gen. seyyaso.
Neuters in us.
Ayu 'life.*
snrovLAii.
Nom. dyu *dytim
Voc. dyu * dyu in
PLT7RAL.
dyuni * dyu
uyuni * dyu
COMPAEISON.
SINOULAB.
PLURAL.
Ace.
ayu
* dyum
dyuni
*dyii
Instr.
dyusa
* ay una
*dyuhi
Dat.
*dyussa
* dyuno
*dyunam
Xdymam
Abl.
dyusd
*dyund
*dyuhi
Gen.
*dyiissa
* dyuno
dyunam
X ayusam
Loc.
dyusi
*dyum
* dyusu
41
For the different endings of the ablative sing, to can be
substituted. This is added to the weakest form pitito abl. of
pita ' father.' bh is interchangeable with h in the suffixes of
the abl. and instr. plur.
§ 18. COMPARISON.
The suffixes which are used to denote the comparative and
superlative value of an adjective are :
tara iyo and tama ittha
e.g. pdpataro or papiyo pdpatamo and pdpittJio
It cannot be said that these suffixes denote a comparative
and superlative meaning. They have mostly an intensive
value. This intensive value is shown when the two suffixes
are united and made one
itthatara as in e.g. pdpitthataro.
The suffix issika is used promiscuously with tara and tama.
There are some words with the suffixes iya and itthay which
are attached to other adjectives from a different root, e.g. :
vuddho ' old ' jeyyo jettho
pasattho 'excellent' seyyo settho
antiko 'near'
nediyo
nedittho
hdlho 'strong*
sddhiyo
sddhittho
appo 'small' \
yuvd ' young ' )
kaniyo
kaniltho
The themes in vat and mat drop of course this termination
before affixing iyo ittho.
gunavd ' excellent *
gujiiyo
gunittho
satimd ' thoughtful '
satiyo
satitt/io
dhittimd ' courageous '
dhitiyo
dhitittho
rUpacd ' beautiful '
rupiyo
rupittho
43
PALI GRAMMAR.
II. DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
1) Personal Pronouns.
Ist Person.
tnyovT.AR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
aham
mayam
amhe
Ace.
mam mamam
amhe
amhdkam
Instr.
mayd
amhehi
Dat.
mat/ham mama
mamam
amham
amhdkam asmd-
amham
kam
Abl.
mayd
amhehi
asmd
Gen.
mama mayham
amham
mamam
amham
kam
arnhdl
cam asmd-
Loc.
mayi
amhesu
asmdsu
Enclitic forms are :
me for the instr. dat. and
gen. sing.
no for the aee. dat. and gen. plur.
2nd Person.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Nom.
tvam tuvam
tarn
tumhe
Ace.
tvam tuvam
tarn
tavam tumhe
tumhdkam
Instr.
tvdya tayd
tumhehi
Dat.
tuyham iava
tumham
tavam tumham
tumhdkam
Abl.
tvayd tayd
id
tumhehi
Gen.
tuyham tava
tumham
tavam tumham
tumhdkam
Loe.
tvayi tayi
tumhesu
Enclitic forms are :
te for the instr. dat. and gen. sing., and
vo for the aee. dat. and gen. plur.
Pronoun of the 3ru Person.
SIKOULAB.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. 80 sa tarn (tad)
8d
Aee. tarn tarn (tad)
tarn
Instr. tena
idya
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 43
BWOVLABl.
Masc.
. and Neut.
Tern.
Dat. tassa assa
tdya
tassd
tassayd tissd
tissayd assd
Abl. tasmd tamhd asmd amhd
tdya
Gen. tassa
I assa
tdtja
tassd
fassayd tissd
tissayd assd
Loc. tasmim tamhi asmim
tdyam tassam tissam assam
PLURAL,
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
te tdni
td
tdyo
Ace.
te tdni
td
tdyo
Instr.
tehi
tdhi
Dat.
iesam tesdnam
tdsam
tdsdnam
Abl.
tehi
tdhi
Gen.
tesam tesdnam
tdsam
tdsdnam
Loc.
tesu
tdsu
In all the oblique cases of the sing, masc. and fem., and in
all cases of the neuter sing, and plur. and of the masc. and
fem. plur., forms beginning with n can be substituted.
It is sometimes added pleonastically to the pronouns ahain
and tvam, as are also all the demonstrative pronouns. It
stands also and must be translated so sometimes for the definite
article.
Many of the oblique cases are used adverbially, especially
tasmd and fena.
The oblique cases of attd, dtitmd can be used reflexively in
place of the three personal pronouns.
attano dsane yeva attdnain dassesi 'showed himself too in his
own seat.' rakkhitum sakam attdnam * to save his own life.*
2) Demonstrative Pronouns.
1) Eso esa efam (efad) 'this' declined like so sd sam.
2) ayam * this ' used adjectively and substantively.
8INOULAB.
Masc. and Neat. Fem.
Nom. ayam idam imam ayam
Ace. imam idam imam
44
PALI ORAMMAB.
8IM0VLAB.
Masc. and Neat
Fem,
Instr.
atiena imind
amind
imdt/a
Dat.
assa imassa
assd assdya imissd imissd-
ya imdya
Abl.
asmd imasmd
imamhd
imdya
Gen.
assa imassa
like dat.
Loc.
asmim imasmim imamhi
assam imissam imdydm
PLURAL.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
ime imdni
imd
imdyo
Ace.
ime imdni
imd
imdyo
Instr.
ehi imehi
imdhi
imdhhi
Dat.
esam esdnam imeaam imesdnam imdmm
imdsdnam
Abl.
ehi emehi
imdhi
Gen.
esam esdnam imesam imesdnam imdsam
imdsdnam
Loc.
esu imesu
Masc. and Neut.
Amu.
8INGULAE.
imdsu
Fem.
Nom. asu adum
asu
Ace.
amum adum
amum
Instr. amund
amuyd
Dat.
amussa adussa
amtissd
amuyd
AbL
amusmd amumhd
amuyd
Gen,
, amussd adussd
amussd
amuyd
Loc.
amumhi amusmim
amussam
amuyam
PLURAL.
Masc. and Fem.
Neut.
Nom. amii
amiujo
amu amuni
Ace. amU
amuyo
amu amuni
Instr.
amabhi
amuhi
Dat.
amusam
amusdnam
Abl.
amubhi
amuhi
-
Gen.
amijsam
amusdnam
Loc.
amusu
A defective pronominal stem is ena. It occurs in the ace.
of all numbers enam, and the instr. sing. : masc. enena, and
fem. enayd.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
45
3) Relative Pronoun.
SINOVLAB.
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nora, yo
yrtw (yrtrf)
yd
Ace. yam
yam
yam
Instr. yena
ydya
Dat. ya%m
yassd
ydya
Abl. yasma
yamha
ydya
Gen. yassa
yassd
ydya
Loc. yasmim
yamhi
PLURAL.
yassam
ydyam
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. ye
ydni
yd ydyo
Ace. ye
ydni
yd ydyo
1
Instr. yehi
ydhi
Dat. y^sam
ydsani
Abl. yehi
ydhi
Gen. yesam
ydsam
Loc. yes«<
ydsii
»0, ayam and eso, along with the personal pronouns, are
sometimes used in conjunction with yo for greater emphasis.
In adverbial use we find the ace. sing. neut. yam, the
instr. yena, the abl. yasmd, and the loc. yasmiin.
4) Interrogative Pronoun.
Masc. ko, neut. kitn, fem. kd, is declined like yo.
In the dat. and gen. masc. and neut. sing, kissa by the
side of kassa, and in the loc. kismim kimhi by the side of
kasmim kamhi. The gen. sing. n. kissa, instr. kena and kasmd,
are used adverbially.
6) Indefinite Pronouns.
In affixing ci (for cid) api and cana to the interrogative
pronoun, the indefinites are formed.
entocLAR.
Masc. and Neut. Fem.
Nom. koci ki/ici ' k&ci.
Ace. kanci
46
PA
LI GRAMMAR
8IM0ULAR. '
Masc. and Neut.
Instr. kenaci
Dat. kassaci
Abl. kasmaci
Gen. kassaci
Loc. kasmici
kismici
FLUKAL.
Masc. and Fern. Neut.
keci kanici
sayam ' self, oneself,' and tumo corresponding to Skr. tmana,
are used as emphatic pronouns with all cases.
§ 19. PRONOMINAL DERIVATIVES.
From pronominal stems derivatives are formed, which have
the character of pronominal adjectives. Thus :
madlyo 'mine,' mamako 'mine,' -y/mad ; amhadlyo 'our,*
\/amhad; and in combination with diso and di, interchangeable
with the form riso, standing for Skr. dr9, we find mddiso
' like me,' etadiso ' like that,' Idiso and idi ' like this,' kidiso
and kldi ' like what ? '
From the stems :
ta ka ya are formed the adjectives
tati kati yati, with the meaning of, respectively, *80
many,' ' how many,' and * as many.'
From
ya ka, with the suflBxes tara tama, we find yataro yatamo
' which,' and kataro katamo ' what, which?' and from i : itaro
* other, difierent.'
A great many derivatives of pronouns are used adverbially.
They will be noticed hereafter.
A number of adjectives are inflected according to the
pronominal declension.
Such words are, e.g.
anno ahhataro ahhatamo * certain ' ; kataro kafamo * which * ;
yataro yatamo * which ? * ; itaro * other * ; tittaro uttamo
NUMERALS. 47
'higher'; adharo 'inferior'; uhhayo 'both*; aparo paro
'other'; dakkhino 'right*; piibbo 'former'; visso 'all*;
and sabbo * all, every.'
Some few of these words form their cases also according
to the nominal declension.
§ 20. NUMERALS.
Cakdinals.
1 eko ekd ekam
2 dve duve ubho (for all 3 genders)
3 tayo tisso tint
4 cattdro {caturo) catasso cattdri
6 panca
6 cha {chat)
7 satta
8 attha
9 nava
10 dam
11 ekarasa ekddasa
12 bdrasa dvddasa
13 tedasa terasa telasa
14 catvddasa cuddasa coddasa
15 pancadasa pannarasa pannarasa
16 solasa sorasa
17 sattadasa satlarasa
18 atthddasa atthdrasa
19 ckunavlsati ekunavisam
20 risad visam
21 ekatlsati ekavUam
22 dvdvlsati bdvisafi
23 tevlmti
24 catuvisati
25 pancavUati
26 chabblsati
27 sattablaati sattavisati
28 atthavlsam
48 PALI GRAMMAR.
Cardinal*.
29 ehunatimmm ehunatimsati
30 timaa timsati
31 ekatimsa
32 dvattimm
40 catfdlisam cattdrlsam
tdlisam talisa
50 pannasa pannasam pannasa
60 safthi
70 sattati
80 aslti
90 navuti
100 sfl^«;,»
200 bdmtam dvdsatam
1,000 sahassam
10,000 dasasnhassam nahiitam
100,000 satasahassam lakkham
1,000,000 dasamfasahassam
100,000,000 Icoti
From koti upwards eacli succeeding numeral is ten million
times the preceding one. After the combination with koti,
pakoti kotippakoti and nahutam ninna/nitam akkhohini and
bindu, the succeeding numerals are neuters in am. The last
numeral given is asankhej/f/am=10,000,000^^.
In combination with una 'deficient, less,' the eka is in
some instances omitted, as unasattamtam * 699.'
addhiko 'exceeding, surpassing,' is used sometimes to
denote the higher number, e.g. : saftddhikavlsa '27,' i.e.
7 exceeding 20 ; atthdramdhikam dvisatam *218.'
The following forms of numerals ought to be noticed.
26 pannavlsati paTicavisati
44 cuitdllsam cattallsam
66 chappannasa
84 ctd/dsiti caturdsVi
Fractionals are :
addfio nddho *J*; ditjaddho diraddho, *1J'; addhateyyo
addhatiyo * 2^ ; addhuddho ' 3^.'
NUMERALS. 49
Other combinations with addho are frequent, e.g. dasaddha'
sata ' 500 ' ; addhatelasasata * 1250.'
catutthamso ' \.'
For the other fractionals the ordinals are used.
To form the multiplicatives khattum is used : ckakkhattum
* once,' solasakkhattum * 16 times.'
To form adverbs from numerals the suffixes dhd and sa are
used :
ekadha * in one way ' ; ekasa 'one by one.*
Adjectives are formed with the suffixes tvV/AOj^fwno and ahgiko:
atthavidho * eightfold ' ; navaviddho ' ninefold ' ; sattagum
* sevenfold ' ; atthangiko ' eightfold ' ; pancahgiko * fivefold.*
Declension of the Cardinals.
eka.
Masc.
and Neut.
Fem.
Nom.
eko
ekam
eka
Voc.
eka
eka
eke
Ace.
ekam
ekam
ekam
Instr.
ekena
ekdya
Dat.
ekassa
ekissa
Abl.
ekasmd
ekamhd
ekdya
Gen.
ekassa
ekma
Loc.
ekasmim
ekamhi
ekissam
ekdyam
The plur. eke * some,' follows the analogy of sahha.
uhho
(For all three genders.)
Nom. Ace. Yoc. uhho
Inst. Abl. uhhohi uhhehi
Dat. Gen. uhhinnam
Loc. ubhoau ubhesu
uhho is in form a dual corresponding to Skr. ubhau. The
declension is very irregular.
dve, dttve.
Nom. Yoc. Ace. dve duve
Instr. Abl. dcthi dvlbhi
Dat. Gen. dvinnam duvinnam
Loc. dviau
60
PALI GRAMMAR.
Masc. and Neut.
^1.
Fem.
Nona.
tayo
tint
tkso
Ace.
iayo
tlni
iisso
Instr.
Abl.
tihi
tihhi
tihi tihhi
Dat. Gen.
tiniiam tinnannam
iissannam tissam
Loc.
fWi
tissu
catur.
tisu tissu
Masc. and Neut.
Fem.
Nom. Voc.
Ace.
cattdro
caturo cattdri
catasso
Instr. Abl.
catuhhhi catuhi catubhi
catuhhhi catuhhi
Dat. Gen.
eatunnam
catassannam
Loc.
eatusu
eatusu
panca, cha.
eatusu eatusu
Masc. Fem.
Neat. Masc. Fem. Neut.
Nom
L.
paTica
cha
Instr. Abl.
pancahi
chahi
Gen.
Dat.
pancannam
channam
Loc.
pahcasu
chasu
All numerals ending in a are declined in like manner.
The numerals in i are declined like the fem. in i.
loke ekasatthiyd arahantesu j'dtesu * when there were 61
arhats in the world ' ; satthim arahatim oka * made sixty
converts ' ; lendni atthasatthiyo * 68 cells.*
The gen. and dat. of risam, timsa, panndsa are given
respectively as visdya, timsdya, pahndsdya.
satam and the higher numerals are declined like neuters in
am. In conjunction with nouns the following constructions
are frequent : —
1) With a noun in the gen. plur. : satam muldnam ' a
hundred roots ' ; acchardnam sahassam ' 1000 nymphs.*
2) As last part of a compound : gdthdsatam ' a hundred
stanzas.*
3) With a noun in the sing, in corap. : chachattdlisasatam
vassam atikhamma ' after the lapse of 146 years.'
4) As first part of a compound the whole in the plural :
sahassajatild * 1000 jatilas.'
m
THE ORDINALS. 51
THE ORDINALS.
The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by means of
suffixes. They are declined like adjectives. The fem. ends,
with exception of the first four numerals which form their
stems in a difierent way, in I, the neuter in am.
For the ordinal of one, pathamo, pathamd, pathamam is used.
From dva and ti we have dutiyo fem. dutiyd^ neut. dutiyam ;
tatiyo fem. tatiyd, neut. tatiyam
The cardinals for *4,' '5,' * 6,' '7' form the ordinals by
adding iha : catuttho, pancafho, chattho, sattho.
For * 4 ' a form turlyo with the fem. turiyd occurs.
Besides the form in tha the suffix ma is added to form the
ordinals, ' 5,' * 6,' * 7,' and onwards up to *99,* e.g.pancamo
*5th'; dasamo ' 10i\i' ', so/asawo * 16th'; ekunavlsatimo '\Qi\x''y
ekarlsatimo *2l8t'; timsatimo * 30th * ; satthimo *60th.*
Besides these longer forms from 10 upwards, we find an
ordinal made from the cardinal by the suffix a : —
pancadaso * 15th ' ; vlso ' 20th ' ; ekavlso ' 2l8t ' ; ievlso
' 23rd ' ; ekunatimso ' 29th ' ; thmo * 30th ' ; cattdhso ' 40th * ;
pamiaw ' 50th ' ; sattho * 60th * ; sattato * 70th ' ; aslto ' 80th ' ;
navido * 90th.'
The ordinal for 100 is satamo, and with the fuller superlative
suffix sataiamo, just as for 1000 sahassamo and sahassatamo.
The fem. of some of the ordinals is used to designate the
day of the month, e.g. : —
paTicaml * the fifth day of the half month.*
ekddasi * the eleventh day of the half month.*
pa/icadasl * the fifteenth day of the half month.*
§ 21. THE VERB.
The native grammarians divide the verbs according to the
manner in which the present and the tenses and modes which
belong to the present system, viz. imperfect, potential and
imperative, are formed into seven classes. These are called
from the verb which serves as prototype for the whole class :
62 PALI GRAMMAR.
1) hhavddiy i.e. * hhu and the other verbs/ or * having hhu
at the beginning.'
2) rudhddi.
3) diiadi.
4) svcidL
5) kiyadi.
6) tanadi.
7) curaiddi.
First class : It consists of the following divisions :
1) The root ending in i or ti is gunated, and a added :
^bhu bhava.
2) To the root ending in a consonant an a is added,
^•9- ^/pac-\-a-=.paca 'to cook*; further, y/tiid *to gnaw';
y/nud * to remove ' ; yjlikh ' to write ' ; \/phus ' to touch.'
3) To the root ending in a vowel, the personal endings are
added without intervening vowel, e.g. \Jyd * to go.*
The second class comprises those verbs in which a nasal
is inserted before the final consonant of the root. The
terminations are added with an intermediate a as in the first
class : y/riidh, rundhati * to restrain.*
The third class adds ya to the root. The phonetic rules
regarding y are applied : y/div^ dibbati * to play.'
The fourth class adds nu nd una to the root : stmoti
pdpundti.
The fifth class adds tid to the root which ends in a vowel :
kindti * to buy ' ; dhundti * to shake.'
The sixth class adds o or m to the root. The root
generally ends in a nasal : tanoti, karoti.
The seventh class adds aya eiio the gunated root: corayati
Every verb is supposed to have two voices with separate
endings : the parasaapadam or transitive, and attanopadam or
intransitive. The attanopadam is very restricted in its use,
and it is therefore difficult to give the attanopadarn for
every verb.
The passive verbs are formed through adding ya to the
root and affixing the ending of the attanopadam, or though
less frequently of the parassapadam to this base.
The tenses of the Pali verb are :
m^mmm
THE VERB. 53
Special tense
1) Present {vattdmdnd), and derived from it two modes:
Optative (sattami) ; Imperative {pancamt) ; and
the Participle Present aa verbal adjective.
2) Imperfect {htyattanl).
General tenses
1) Perfect (jparohkhd).
2) Aorid {ajjatanl).
3) Future (bhavtssantl).
4) Conditional (kdldtipatti) .
The general tenses often take the basis of the special
tenses, and vice versd.
A verb can appear in different classes without, however,
changing its meaning, e.g. titthati and thdti * to stand ' ;
daddti, deti and dajjati * to give ' ; vadati, vadeti, vajjati and
vajjeti * to speak.'
Other roots appear in different classes with a differentiation
of meaning, such as, e.g. : '^/vid, vidati ' to know ' ; vindati * to
find, to get ' ; and vijjati * to be, to exist.'
1) It is needless to advert to the fact that the classes have
been made up to a great extent to bring the conjugation of
Pali in a closer connection with that of Sanskrit.
2) The tenses of the Aorist and Imperfect are simply
tenses of the past, and it is therefore not advisable to take
the Imperfect separately from the Aorist. It is quite true
that originally there existed a difference in the meaning
between Aorist and Imperfect ; but in the Pali texts, as they
lie before us, no such difference can be traced. "We shall
therefore consider the Imperfect simply as a tense of the past
not dependent on the Present system.
3) The Perfect tense is of rare occurrence.
I. The Present System.
The endings are the following
:
PRESENT PARASSAPADAM.
phessnt attawopadam.
1) mi 1) ma
1) e 1) mhe
2) si 2) tha
2) se 2) vhe
3) ti 3) anti
3) te 3) ante are
64 PALI GRAMMAR.
niPBRATlTE rAEASSAPADAM. IMPERATITB ATTANOPADAM.
1) mi 1) ma 1) e 1) dmase
2) — hi 2) tha 2) asu 2) vho
3) iu 3) anfu 3) <a;w 3) antam
OPTATIVE PAUA8SAPADAM. OPTATIVE ATTANOPADAM.
1) e eyydmi 1) eyydma 1) eyyam 1) eyydmhe
2) e eyydsi 2) eyydtha 2) e^Ao 2) eyyavho
3) c cyyrt 3) eyywn 3) e^Aa 3) erawj
"We best divide the verbs into the following classes :
1) Verbs which affix the endings given above without
intervening rowel.
2) Reduplicating class.
3) Nasal class.
4) a- class.
5) ya- class.
I. The Root Class of Sanskrit grammar. Through the
contraction of aya into e, of ava into o, many verbs follow
now the analogy of this class. These are either primitive
verbs such as j'eti for j'ayati, or derivatives such dpddeti for
dpddayati. Most of the verbs have forms in other classes.
A distinction between strong and weak forms takes place
only occasionally.
We give as paradigms :
\/i ^Jya
Sing, emi Plu. ema Sing, ydmi Plu. ydma
„ esi „ etha „ yd^i „ ydtha
„ eti „ enti, yanti „ ydti „ yanti
Like emi, semi * to lie down.' The third person attanopa-
dani occurs as
Sing, sete Plur. sente
Verbs following the analogy of ydti are, vdti ' to blow ' ;
pdti * to protect * ; bhdti ' to shine.'
Besides the forms, according to the reduplicating class,
o( y/dd 'to give ' and thd * to stand/ we have deti fhati,
which follow the analogy of ydti.
In the same way a contracted form of verbs in aya, ava
follows this class, e.g. :
PRESENT TENSE. 66
koti, a contracted form of b/tavati, \/bhu * to exist,' which
shows the following forms :
Sing, homi Plur. homa
„ host „ hotha
„ hoti „ honti
y/bru 'to speak' exhibits besides the form braviiif a con-
tracted form bruti.
Sing, brumi Plur. brUma
„ bmsi „ brutha
„ bruti „ bravanti
The ATTANOPADAM is
Sing, brave Plur. br&mhe
„ JrMse „ br-Avhe
„ JrS^e „ bravante
The most important verb of this division is ^/as * to be.*
Sing, asmi amhi Plur. asma amha
„ asi ahi „ attha
„ atthi „ santi
Single forms following the first class are, e.g. :
III. p. sing, vatti V vac * to speak,' at the side of vacati
and vadati.
III. p. sing, hantiy yjhan, ' to strike.'
III. p. pi. duhanfi, y/duh ' to milk.*
III. p. pi. lihanti, y/lih *to lick.*
III. p. sing. att. hanute, y/hnu * to conceal oneself.*
II. Reduplicating Class.
The present form is formed by prefixing a reduplication
to the root. The rules of reduplication are :
1) The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is always
the first consonant of the root.
2) A non-aspirate is substituted in reduplication for an
aspirate.
3) A palatal is substituted for a guttural or //.^
* The substitution of the palatals for the gutturals shows that the vowel of the
reduplication syllabic was uiuformly an #, as in Greek.
66 PALI GRAMMAR.
4) A long vowel is shortened in the reduplicated syllable.
Examples of reduplication are ;
dadiifi, yjda * to give.*
dadhdti, dahdti y/dhd * to put.'
titthdU, y/thd * to stand.'
jahdii, ^/hd * to leave.'
jiihoti, y/hu * to sacrifice.*
pibati, or pivati ^pd * to drink/ cpr. Lat. hihere.
The conjugation is as follows :
y/dd
Sing, dadami Plur. damma
„ daddsi „ dattha
„ daddti „ dadanti
In analogy with the first pers. plu. a new singular was
created, viz. : dammi, dasi, dati.
Besides these forms we have :
dajjati according to the ya class. This formation is
probably due to the optative. The form deti was noticed
above.
Of the attanopadam only a few forms can be quoted, viz. :
I. sing, dade and I. plur. daddmase.
y/thd
Sing, titthdmi Plur. titthdma
„ titthasi „ tkdtha titthatha
„ titthati „ titthanti
III. The Nasal Class : In it we comprise the verbs of the
fourth, fifth and sixth classes of the native grammarians.
They form their present stem by adding in the fourth and
sixth class no if the root ends in a vowel, o if in n, or as in
the case of karoti in r. These verbs add arbitrarily also nd,
the class-sign of the fifth class. The few verbs belonging to
that class always retain the class-sign na.
As paradigms may serve :
y/su ' to hear.'
Sing, aiinomi, sundmi Plur. mnoma, simdma
„ suTiosi, sunasi sundst „ aunotha, sunatha
„ sunoti, smiati „ siinanti
PRESENT TENSE. 67
In the same way y/tan 'to stretcli' is conjugated, of which
the attanopadam occurs as :
Sing, tanve Plur. tanumhe
„ tanme „ tanuvhe
„ tanute „ tanvante
y/ht ' to buy ' has only the forms in a kindmi.
The most important verb belonging to this class is ^kar
* to make.'
Sing, karomi kummi Plur. karoma
„ karosi „ karotha
„ karoti „ karonti
The aUanopadam shows the following forms ;
Sing, kuhhe
Plur.
kuhhase
kuruse
kuhhate
kurute
kubbdmhe
kurumhe
kubbdvhe
ktiruvhe
kubbante
kurunte
kubbati
rV". The a Class : The most numerous class of verbs is that
which, while gunating the root ending in i or u to ay or av
respectively, adds the personal endings with intervening a.
Closely connected with this class in Pali are those verbs
which add to a consonantal stem a before the endings.
Lastly, we have to count among this class those verbs which
strengthen the root by a nasal, and add the personal endings
with a or less frequently /.
The first two divisions belong to the first class of the
native grammarians, the last division forms the second class.
As paradigms we take :
^bhu * to be, to exist.*
Sing, bhavdmi
Plur.
bhavdma
„ bhavasi
it
bhavatha
„ bhavati
>f
bhavanti
The aUanopadam is
Sing, bhave
Plur.
bhavdmhe
„ hhavase
»
bhatache
„ bhavate
t>
bhavante
68 PALI ORAMMAE.
A consonantal stem is y/tud *to push/ which is conjugated
exactly like bhavatO
y/rudh * to restrain ' has the following forms :
Sing, rundhdmi and rundhlmi
„ rundhaai „ rundhisi
„ rundhati „ rundhlti
Plur. rundhdma „ rimdhlma
„ rundhatha „ rundhltha
„ rundhanti „ rundhinti
A few verbs form their present tense by adding ccha to the
root, e.g. y/gam * to go,' gacchdmi.
There is, however, also a form gamati *he goes* and
ghammati. This latter form can be substituted for all the
forms of the verb. Cpr. further hravlti.
The ya Class: The present tense of this class adds ya
to the root. These form the third class of the native
grammarians. All the phonetic rules regarding y are
applied, e.g. :
\/div -\- ya =■ dihhati
y/siv -\- ya ■=■ sihhati
y/yudh -\- ya =. yujjhati
§ 22. MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.
1) Imperative : It is formed by adding the endings given
on page 54 to the present stem. The second pers. sing. par.
sometimes show the mere stems without the characteristic
ending. As paradigms may serve :
y/i * to go.'
I. sing, emi I. plur. etna
II. „ ehi II. „ etha
III. ,, etu III. ,, entu
1 The difference between these two conjugations can only be traced in
Sanskrit, where the accent is varying.
MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 59
•s/as * to be.*
I. sing, asmi I. plur. asma
II. „ ahi II. „ attha
III. „ atthu III. „ 8antu
\/da ' to give.*
An imperative can be formed from all the stems in
use, e.g. :
II. sing, dehi daddhi dajja II. plur. detha daddtha
The attanopadam has the following forms :
I. sing, dade I. plur. daddmase
II. „ dadassu II. „ dadavho
III. „ dadatam III. „ dadantam
y/kr ' to make.'
II. sing, kuru karohi II. plur. karotha
III. „ karotu kurufu III. „ karontu kuhhantu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, kuhhe I. plur. kubbdmase
II. „ kurussu II. „ kuruvho
III. „ kurutam III. „ kubbantam
^Jbhu.
II. sing, bhava bhavdhi II. plur. bhavatha
III. „ bhavatu III. „ bhavantu
ATTANOPADAM.
II. sing, bhavassu II. plur. bhavavho
III. „ bhavatam III. „ bhavantam
y/gam * to go.*
The Imperative is formed also from all the stems in use, ^.^7. :
II. sing, gaccha, gacchdhi, ghamma, ghammahi
2) Optative : It is formed by adding the endings given
on page 54. The endings showed originally only forms
commencing with ya. A combination, however, took place
in most cases with the final vowel of the stem. These forms
could again be contracted into e.
As paradigms may serve :
y/bhu.
I. sing, heyydmi, bhaveyya I. plur. heyydma
huveyya, bhave
60
PALI GRAMMAR.
II.
sing.
hei/i/dsi
II. plur. heyydtha
III.
»>
hei/i/a
III. „ heyyum
ATTANOPADAM.
I.
sing.
bhave, hhaveyydmi I. plur. hhaveyydmhe
II.
w
hhavetho
II. „ bhaveyyacho
III.
»
bhavetha
III. „ bhaveram.
y/as.
I.
sing.
assam
I. plur. assdma
II.
»
assa
II. „ assatha
III.
)}
assa, siyd
III. „ asBu siyum
Vkr.
I.
kare,
kareyya,
kubbe, kubbeijya, kayird,
kayirdmi
II.
n
kareyyasi,
„ kubbeyyasi, „
kayirdsi
III.
»
kareyya.
„ kubbeyya, „
kayird
I.
kareyydma
[, kubbeyydma,
kayirdma
II.
kareyydtha, kubbetha,
kayirdtha
III.
kareyyam,
kubbeyam,
y/dd.
kayirum
Shows the forms
dajj'd, cladeyya, dajjeyya, deyya.
VJna.
jdniya, janha^ jdneyya.
^gam.
gacche, gaccheyya.
§ 23. GENERAL TENSES.
.The Perfect System.
The formation of the Perfect is essentially alike in all
verbs. The characteristics of the formation are : 1) a stem
made by reduplication of the root and endings, unlike those
of the present and the other tenses. The rules for redupli-
cation are the same as those given for the second conjugation,
e.g. : yj gnm-=.jagdma.
The perfect in published texts is of rare occurrence.
GENERAL TENSES. 61
The endings are :
FOR THB PARA8SAPADAM. FOB THE ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. mha I. sing, i mhe
II. „ e II. „ ttha II. „ ttho vho
III. „ a III. „ w III. „ ttha re
Boots ending in consonants insert an i between stem and
consonantal endings.
As paradigms may serve :
y/bhu.
I. sing, bahhuva I. plur. babhuvimha
11. „ babhuve II. „ babhuvittha
III. „ babhuca III. „ babhuvu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, babhuvi 1. plur. babhuvimhe
II. „ babhuvittho II. „ babhuvivho
III. ,, babhuvittha III. „ babhuvire
^/pac.
PABASSAFADAM.
I.
sing, papaca
I.
plur, papacimha
II.
„ papace
II.
„ papacittha
III.
„ papaca
III.
ATTANOPADAM.
„ papacu
I. sing, papaci I. plur. papacimhe
II. „ papacittho II. „ papacicho
III. „ papacittha III. „ papacire
y/ah 'to speak' is only used in the III. per. sing, and plur.
of the perfect.
III. sing, aha III. plur. dhamsu and dhu
§ 24. AORIST AND IMPERFECT.^
The aorist and imperfect are, as stated above (page 53),
blended into one form, partaking of the character of both.
The native grammarians are at great pains to give a paradigm
> Cpr. H. 01denb«rg, Kohn's Zeitachrift, xxt. 319.
62 TALI GRAMMAR.
for both forms, which, however, turns out futile. Moreover,
no difference can be made in the syntactic use of the two
tenses.
The paradigm of the native grammarians is for the
hlyattanl (imperfect) :
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. amhd
II. ,, 0 II. „ attha
III. „ a III. „ 6
PAUA88AFADAU.
I. sing, im I. plur, mhase
II. „ se 11. „ rham
III. „ ttha III. „ tthum
For the aj/atani (aorist) :
ATTANOPADAK.
I. sing, im I. plur. imhd
II. „ 0 II. „ tttha
III. „ i III. „ tm inisu
PARA88APADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. imhe
II. „ ise II. „ ivham
III. „ a III. „ u
"We can distinguish altogether three different formations
in Piili. The augment a is in prose generally put before the
verb. In verse it is omitted according to the exigencies of
the metre. With the negative particle md the aorist is used
as an imperative.
First Formation.
PA&AS8APADAM.
I. sing, am I. plur. amha
II. „ a, 0 II. „ attha
III. „ d III. „ urn
ATTANOPADAX.
I. sing. — I. plur. dmhase
II. „ ase II. „ acham
III. „ attha III. „ atthum
The nasal in the first pcrs. sing. plur. is often omitted.
AORIST AND IMPERFECT. 63
Only verbs in consonants form their preterite according to
this formation. Its use is very limited. This formation can
be considered as an imperfect if it is used with the present
stem.
Second Formation.
isum
PA&A88APADAH.
I.
sing.
im
I.
plur.
imha
IL
»
i
II.
)>
ittha
III.
»
i
III.
ATTAKOPADAM,
»
tnisu
I.
sing.
—
I.
plur.
tmhe
II.
>>
ise
II.
»
ivham
III.
))
—
III.
i>
—
This form is regularly used for all stems ending in con-
sonants. For the first pers. sing, we find in verse some-
times the endings kam and issam according to the analogy
of Sanskrit.
Third Formation.
The third form of the aorist is an 5 aorist. The forms are :
PARA8SAPADAM.
I. sing, siin simha
II. „ si sittha
III. „ si sum
This formation is used for the verbs ending in vowels.
Some verbs ending in consonants follow this analogy,
and then, of course, all phonetic change takes place.
Causatives follow the analogy of this aorist after contracting
aya into e.
Besides these some forms occur which date back to a
formation anterior to the fixing of Ptili.
Many verbs appear in all the three formations.
The following paradigms will illustrate the different
formations :
y/bhu.
I. sing, ahhavam I. plur. abhatamhA
II. ,, abhavo II. „ abhacattha
G4
[
TALI GRAMMAR.
III.
sing.
arJAflim
III.
plur.
ahhavu
I.
»
a /ill vain
I.
)>
ahuvamhd
11.
>>
ahuvo
II.
i)
ahuvattha
III.
»
ahiica
III.
>>
—
I.
>>
ahosim
I.
»
—
II.
»
ahosi
II.
>>
—
III.
>»
ahosi
III.
>>
ahesum
I.
))
ahhavim
I.
»
—
I.
»
ahumhd
III.
>>
aim ahu before
vowels ahud
r
III.
»
ahum
^dd
.
I.
sing.
adadam,
etc.
I.
»
add, etc.
III.
plur.
adum
I.
»
addsim
I.
>>
adadmha
II.
)>
addsi
II.
J)
adasittha
III.
»>
addsi
Vkr
III.
»
addsim adamsu
I.
sing.
akaram^
etc.
I.
w
akdsim aJidsi,
etc.
III.
plur.
akdsum
I.
»
akd
{
II.
III.
akattha
okanisu
I.
>»
akarim, <
3tc.
y/as
III.
>>
akarum akarimsu
I.
sing.
dsim
I.
plur.
dsimha
II.
»
dsi
II.
>>
dsittha
III.
»
dsi
III.
»
dsiim dsimsu
y/gam.
I.
sing.
agam
I.
plur.
agnmha
II.
>>
aga
II.
>)
aguttha
III.
>>
agd
III.
})
agum
I.
>>
agamd
agamim
II.
>>
agami
III.
>>
agnmi
I.
>>
agacchi
I.
»
aganchim
(
I.
f>
aganchimhd
AORIST AND IMPERFECT.
65
II. sing. agaTichi agancho II. plur. agailchittha
III. „ agaTichi III. „ agailchimm
II. and III. sing, agacchiai
y/vac.
I.
sing.
avacd
II.
per. plur. avacuttha
I.
>>
arocam
11.
„ avocaiha
III.
>>
avoca
III.
. y/lahh.
plur. avociim
I.
sing.
alattham
I.
sing, alahhim
II.
>>
alattha
II.
„ alahhi
III.
))
alattha
III.
,, alahhi
After contracting aya into e, the aorist of the causatives is
also formed according to the third formation : —
I. sing, acoresim
II. „ acoresi
III.
acoresi
I. plur. acoresimha
II. „ acoresittha
III.
acoremm
In roots ending in consonants s influences the last letter as
usual, e.g. : adakkhi from passati ' to see,' but also apassi ;
akkocchi from kosati ' to revile,' but also akkosi.
Of forms in issatn or isam, I. pers. sing, second formation,
we notice sandhdvissam, paccavekkhisam, gacchisam, vandissaniy
etc.
For the atianopadam the paradigm is the following :
I.
sing.
I.
plur.
abhavdmhase
II.
)y
abhavase
II.
ahhavham
III.
>>
ahhavattha
III.
ahhavatthum
I.
it
—
I.
abhavimhe
II.
>»
ahhavise
11.
abhavivham
III.
»
abhavittha
III.
—
The attanopadam is of rare occurrence, and only a few
forms can be given :
II. pers. sing, atimannittho
I. pers. plur. akardmhase
66
PALI GRAMMAR.
§ 25. FUTUEE.
The tense sign is ss, which is added to the root directly, or
by the auxiliary vowel i. The endings are :
POB THB FARA88APADAM.
I.
sing.
88dmi
I. plur.
ssdma
II.
»
ssasi
11. „
ssatha
HI.
»
88ati
III. „
FOR THE ATTANOPADAM.
ssanti
I.
sing.
ssam
I. plur.
ssdmhe
II.
»
ssasse
II. „
asavhe
III.
»>
ssate
in. „
ssante (ssare)
The form to which these endings are added is mostly the
strengthened. They can, however, also be added to the
special base.
PARAS8APADAM.
I.
sing.
hhavissdmi
I.
plur.
bhauasdma
II.
»
bhavissasi
II.
)i
bharissatha
III.
»
hhavissati
III.
ATTAKOPADAM.
. >>
bhavissanti
I.
sing.
bhamssam
I.
plur.
bharissdmh
II.
>»
bbavissasse
II.
>i
bhavissavhe
III.
t)
bhavissate
III.
))
bhavissante
{bhtt'
vissare)
The 88 being added without intermediate vowel affects of
course the preceding consonant : dakkhati to passati *to see' ;
sakkhite to aakkoti ' to be able.'
A misunderstanding of these forms gave rise to the forma-
tions dakkhissati and sakkhissati, with a double future sign.
Cpr. further lacchati to labhati *to take*; checchati to chindati
* to cut ; ' bhejjati to bhindati ' to break.'
Forms with auxiliary vowel are also in use, e.g. : labhiasati.
From the special tense we have futures like gacchiasati to
gacchati, but also gamissati; juho88ati, juhissati to juhoti.
karoti has besides the future karissati, a contracted form :
I. sing, kdhdmi I. plur. kdhdma
II. „ kdhasi kahisi II. „ kdhatha
III. ,, kdhati kdhiti III. ,, kahanti kahinti
CONDITIONAL. 67
In the same way eti * to go ' has, besides the future
essatiy ehiti.
The contracted form hoti from hhavati shows the following
forms :
I. sing, hemiy hehdmi, hohdmi^ hessami, hehtssdmi, hohissami.
II. „ hest, hehisi, hohisi, hessasi, hehissasi, hohissasi.
III. „ heti, hetiti, hoiifi, hessati, hehissati, hohissati.
I. plur. hema, hehdma^ hohdma^ hessdma^ hehissdma, hO'
hissdma.
II. „ hetha, hehittha, hohittha^ hessatha, hehissafha,
hohissatha.
III. „ henti, hehinti, hohinti, hessanti, hehissanti, hohissanti.
From y/su * to hear ' future att. sussam, ^dd dassati and
att. dassam,
§ 26. CONDITIONAL.
Prom the future stem is made an augment preterite by
prefixing the augment a and adding the secondary endings :
PARASSAPADAM.
I. sing, ssam I. plur. ssdmhd
II. „ 8se {ssa) II. „ ssatha
III. „ ssd (ssa) III. „ ssamsu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, ssam I. plur. ssdmhase
II. „ ssase II. „ ssavhe
III. „ ssatha III. „ ssitmu
The endings are added with or without intervening /.
The paradigm is :
PARASSAPADAM.
I. sing, abhavissam I. plur. ahhavissdtnhd
II. „ abhavissa °88e II. „ abhavissatha
III. „ abhavma °88d III. „ abhavissamsu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, abhavissam I. plur. abhavissdmhase
II. „ abhavissase II. „ abhavmavhe
III. „ abhavissatha III. „ abhavmiiMU
68 PALI GRAMMAR.
§ 27. DERIVATIVE CONJUGATION.
The derivative conjugation may be divided under five
headings :
I. Passive: It is formed through adding ya to the weakest
form. The endings are those of the altanopadam^ but also
those of the parassapadam occur, y affects a preceding con-
sonant in the usual way. In a few instances iya is added
instead of ya, and the endings of the passives are added to
the present active.
Cpr. e.g. : iicchate vuccati from y/vac * to speak ' ; vussati
vasiyati from \/va8 *to dwell.' kayyati karlyati kariyyati
kayirati are given as passive to karoti. dlyati from y/dd * to
give*; thlyate from \/thd * to stand'; gamynte, gamiyaii
gacclnyate ^J gam * to go ' ; gheppati and gayhati to ganhati
' to take.'
II. The Intensive or Frequentative is formed by
reduplication. Its conjugation is in accordance with the
second conjugational class, the reduplication, however, is
peculiar.
The reduplicating syllable is composed of a single con-
sonant with a heavy vowel : Idlappaii ' to lament ' ; ddddallati
* to blaze.*
The reduplicating syllable has a final consonant taken from
the end of the root. This consonant is a nasal which
substitutes any other consonant ; cankamati jahgamati
cahcalati.
Not many instances of the intensive are met with.
III. The Desiderative : The desiderative stem is formed
from the simple root by the addition of a reduplication and
by an appended sa. This sa affects of course the preceding
consonants. Some roots form an abbreviated stem by a con-
traction of reduplication and root together in one syllable.
Examples are, huhhukkati, yhhiij', pivdsati, y/pd\ vlmamsati
for mimams ; jigimsati, \/hr ; dicchati, y/dd.
IV. The Causative : From every root can be formed
a causative ; this is done by affixing aya to the strengthened
P^LRTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS. 69
root. Tlie native grammarians range these verbs under the
seventh class.
This aya can optionally be contracted into e. Besides this
formation, another is in use : apaya contracted into ape is
added to the root. A diflferentiation of meaning is sometimes
to be traced.
If contracted into e, the conjugation follows of course the
first conjugational class; the forms in aya and apaya are
conjugated like bhavati.
As causative of y/gam * to go ' are given gamayati, gameti
gacchdpetiy gacchapayati ; yjhan * to kill ' has haneti, ghdteti.
V. Denominatives : From every noun may be formed
a denominative. The sufiixes employed are : aya, aya, lya.
e.g. : ciceitdyati ' to splash ' ; piittlyati ' to treat as a son.'
§ 28. PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.
1) The Participle Present is formed by the suffixes at
and anta, which are added to the present stem, e.g.: gacckanto
gaccham (see above, page 38). In the same way these suffixes
are added to the future stem, to form 2) Participle Future.
In the same way the suffixes mdna and dna are used for
the Present Participle Attanopada.
3) Of the Perfect Participle in vams only a few
doubtful traces are left, tndu and viddasu for vidvams.
4) The Past Participle Passive is formed by the suffixes
ta and na, which are added directly to the root or through
an intervening vowel i. Of course all phonetic changes
take place : —
kato ' made ' ; gato ' gone ' ; icchito * wished * ; phuttho
' touched * ; laddho * taken ' ; vutto ' spoken * ; vapifo and vufto
' shaven ' ; dinuo * given.*
5) From the Past Participle Passive is formed a
secondary derivative with the meaning of a Past Active
Participle by adding the suffixes rat, rant, e.g. :
hutavd hutavanlo * having sacrificed * ; manditard, mandita-
vanto * having adorned * ; hhtittard ' having eat^n.*
II. Gerundives : The suffixes by which gerundives are
70 PALI GRAMMAR.
regularly and ordinarily formed are : ya tavya (tabba tayya)
aniya. They are joined with or without intervening vowel i.
e.g. : bhabbo for bhavyo; karanlyo kdriyo kayyo kayiro kattabbo
* that ought to bo done * ; ddtayyo ddtabbo ddtabyo * that
ought to be given.*
III. Gerunds : The gerund is formed by the suffixes tvd
ya tvdna and tuna. They take arbitrarily the vowel i
between root and ending. Sometimes the suffixes ya and tvd
are united into one.
Remarkable forms are :
datfhu and disvd * having seen.'
anuvicca „ anuviditvd * having known.'
dhacca „ dhanitrd ' having thrown.*
pappuyya „ pdpayitcd * having obtained.'
vineyya „ vinayitvd * having laid aside.'
nicchcyya * having ascertained.'
Cpr. further : passitvdna and passituna * having seen.'
atmtvd and atikkamitvd 'having approached.*
datvd, ddya, daditvd * having given.*
katvdna, kdiuna * having made.*
gayha, ganhiya, ganhitvd ' having taken.*
IV. Infinitives : They are formed by the suffixes turn
tave, and rarely tuye. The infinitive can be formed from the
special base, or from the root ; in both cases an i is
arbitrarily inserted :
e.g. gantum * to go * ; laddhiim * to take * ; vaditum * to
speak * ; sunitum and aotave * to hear ' ; vippahatave * to give
up * ; ganetuye * to count.'
§ 29. INDECLINABLES.
I. Adverbs.
ADVERBS FORMED BY SUFFIXES.
Classes of adverbs are formed by the addition of adverbial
suffixes not only to pronominal roots or stems, but also to
noun and adjective stems.
INDECLINABLES. 71
Most of these sufl&xes belong to a time anterior to the
fixing of the Piili, as a comparison with Sanskrit and the
cognate languages will show.
1) ^ standing for an original tas. It gives to the word
to which it is added mostly an ablative sense, but sometimes
also a local. It may be added to pronouns, prepositions
and nouns. In the last case it is regarded as the regular
substitute for the termination of the ablative (see page 41).
Examples are from pronominal stems : ato ' hence ' ; i(o
* here ' ; tato * from that place * ; t/ato ' from what ' ; etc.
2) From prepositions : abhito * near ' ; parato * further.*
3) From noun and adjective stems: aggato 'before*;
dalikhinato ' on the south ' ; sahbato * from every side * ;
pitthito * from the back ' ; pitito * on the father's side.'
II. Adverbs of a local sense are formed by an original tra.
This tra is either preserved or assimilated to ita or ttha
(page 16). It is added to pronominal roots and nouns.
Examples are :
1) atra, attha ' here ' ; tatra and tatiha * there ' ; kutra and
kuttha ' where,' 2) annatra and annatlha ' elsewhere ' ; ubha-
yattha, ubhayatta ' in both places.'
dha and assimilated ha also form adverbs with a local sense.
The forms are used promiscuously: t'ha and idha 'here.'
Interchangeable with this last suffix are : ham and him
also forming local adverbs ; kuhirn, ktiham, kaham * where ' ;
taham, tahwi * there ' ; yahini * where.'
III. Adverbs of manner are formed by means of the
suffix thd mostly from pronominal roots : tathd * so ' ; yatha
* as ' ; but also from adjectives, e.g. sabbatha * in every way ' ;
annathd ' in another way.*
By means of the suffix ti or Hi. This adverb is very
extensively used in cases of indirect narrative, or of
enumeration, or of quoting the words and thoughts of others.
By means of the suffix m or ira ' like as.' By the side of
iva also viya and va. The former seems a metathesis of iva ;
eva and yera, heca * just, even ' ; evam related to em
' thus ' ; kiva ' how ? '
IV. Adverbs of time are formed by means of the suflix dd : —
72 PALI GRAMMAR.
hadd ' when ? * ; ya</d * whenever * ; sadd and sabbadd
' always.*
Related to da seems di in padi * if.'
2. By means of the compound suffix : ddni, ddnim for
ddnlm. iddni, iddnim * now ' ; taddni, taddnim * then.*
3. By means of the suffix rahi (Skr. rhi) : etarahi, and
seldom etarhi ' now * ; tarahi ' then.*
V. By means of the suffix dhd are formed adverbs,
especially from numerals, signifying * fold, times.'
Cpr. ekadhd, etc. ' in one way ' ; bahudhd * in many ways * ;
sabbadhd ' everywhere.* Sometimes we find the suffix d/ii
used with the same sense : sabbadhi \see page 49).
VI. Adverbs of quantity, or measure, or manner, are
formed by means of the suffix so, Skr. 9as. e.g. : bahuso
' greatly ' ; paTicaso ' by fives * ; akkharaso * letter by letter ' ;
atthaao * according to the sense.'
VII. Case Forms used as Adverbs.
A large number of adverbs have cas.e-suffixes, from stems
which are or are not otherwise in use.
1) The Accusative : i/am with the meaning of * that, as,
became * ; tarn (tad) ' there, thither * ; kiin * why ' ; idam
' here.'
Compounded with id we have cid=.ca-\-id: ce 'even,* and
then after false analogy noce * if not ' instead of tie.
Noun and adjective stems so used are : —
ndma * by name * ; raho ' secretly ' ; rattam * at night * ;
saccam * in truth * ; niccam * always ' ; ciram * long ' ; bhlyo
' again.'
As accusatives of nouns and adjectives we must also con-
sider several adverbs of obscure connection which go back
like most of the preceding in their formation to a period
anterior to Pali.
e.g. : ittn/ii ' silently * ; sdyam * in the evening * ; aram
* speedily ' ; alam ' enough ' ; mitho and mithu ' mutually * ;
sammd ' fully * ; ac^jju ' instantly * ; isam * a little.'
2) The Instrumental : Most of the pronominal adjective
and noun-stems noticed under ace. occur in adverbial use : —
INDECLINABLES. 73
yena 'because, for which*; dakkhinena 'on the south';
cirena * after a long time ' ; diva ' by day * ; amd * with.*
3) The Dative : It is less extensively used in an adverbial
sense, e.g. : cirdya * for a long time * ; sukhdya * for the
benefit * ; hitdya ' for the benefit.'
4) The Ablative : Most of the pronominal stems are
used adverbially, e.g. : yasmd ' because ' ; kasmd ' why ? ' ;
durd, drd * far off ' ; heithd * under, below * ; paccbd ' behind.'
The original of the ablative d is of necessity lost in Pali.
5) The Genitive : Its use is very limited, e.g. : kissa
' why ? ' ; cirassa * long * ; hetu and heto ' on account of.'
6) The Locative : Forms adverbially used are, e.g. : hhuvi
* on the earth ' ; dre, dure * after.'
II. Prepositions.
Under the name of upasagga (prepositions) the native
grammarians comprise a number of twenty words, which
modify the meaning of the verb or substantive to which
they are added.
Put in alphabetical order they are as follows :
•^ati 'over, beyond.'
t adhi * above, over, superior to.'
•\anu 'after, under, less than.'
•^apa 'away, from.'
ajn ' near, close by.'
abhi ' to, unto, against.'
aca 'away, down, oft.'
t d * until, as far as.'
t* ud * upwards, above.'
t«j5rt ' below, less.'
du 'hardly.'
nir * downwards.'
ni {nir) ' outward.'
pa 'forward, onward.'
"^pati or pati ' towards.'
pard ' away, aside, back.*
pari ' around, about.'
74 I*ALI GRAMMAR.
ri * apart, asunder.'
8am * with, together.*
8ti *well.*
To these words must bo added a few others, which are
equally combined with verbs and nouns, but are of a more
limited use, such as :
fanto antara 'within.*
t<f« 'manifestly, close.'
t tiro * across, beyond.'
pdtu * manifestly.'
These are mainly used in composition with the verbs a«,
hhuy kr.
All of the above-mentioned particles and adverbs
marked f are used as prepositions, and govern nouns. To
these must be added a few words, which are used like
modern prepositions and adverbs and only comparatively
seldom in combination with verbs and nouns, e.g. :
adho * below.*
uddham ubbham * upwards.*
tiriyam 'across.*
pacchd 'behind.*
pararn 'beyond, after.*
piird ' before.'
bahi ' outwards.'
rite 'except.*
vind * without.*
saha, samam, saddhim ' with.*
§ 30. COMPOUNDS.
1) Stems which admit of inflection are, as in other
languages, combined to form compounds, which are treated as
if simple in respect to inflection and construction.
COMPOUNDS. 75
2) As regards compounds, seldom more than two or three
stems are combined in the older language; but, as in
Sanskrit, the later the language is, the more compounds,
and cumbrous compounds prevail.
3) It is of course difficult to determine which compounds
Piili has formed itself, and which it has in common with
other Indian languages. A sort of criterion is, if we
find words compounded according to rules which are no more
in abeyance in Pali ; but even that does not prove con-
clusively that a compound belongs as commonwealth to the
Indian languages.
e.g. : sappuriso Skr. satpurusha * a good man ' ; pullihgam
Skr. pumlinga * manhood,' for which in later Pali we find
pumalingam.
4) These compounds may be divided into three principal
classes :
I. Copulative or Aggregative Compounds (dvandm).
The members are coordinate; in uncom pounded condition
they would be joined with ca ' and.' Examples are very
numerous.
The whole has the gender and declension of its last
member, and is in number a plural, e.g. : elaka-miga-sukara-
pakkhtno.
The compound, without regard to the number denoted or
the gender of its constituents, becomes a singular collective.
The gender is mostly neuter.
e.g. : hiriottappam = hiri + ottappam
ndmarupam = ndmam + rupam
ddUddsa^i = ddsi + ddso
ahoratto, ahoratti, ahoraftam
kusalakusalamy dhammddhammo, but also as a
plural dhammddhammd.
Puma * a male ' has two bases in composition : puma and
pum : of the former we have itthipumam * male and female * ;
of the latter pumitthi 'masculine and feminine.'
Nouns, adjectives and particles are not infrequently
76 PALI GRAMMAR.
repeated to give an intensive or distributive repetitional
meaning, e.g. :
divase divase ' day after day * ; gdmagdmam * village after
village ' ; anhamahnam * mutually ' ; punapunam * again and
again/
II. Determinative Compounds (fappurisa).
There are two divisions ;
1) Dependent compounds=the tappurisa proper, in which
the prior member is a substantive word standing to the other
in the relation of a case dependent on it.
2) Descriptive corQpo\md8=^kammadfidraj/a, in which the
prior member is an adjective, or another word having the
value of an adjective qualifying a noun.
I. Dependent Compounds.
They can of course be used either substantively or
adjectivel3% The case relation may be of any kind.
hrahmaloko ' Brahma world ' ; padodakam ' water for the
feet * ; accharasambhavo ' descent from a nymph ' ; saccavadi
' truthful ' ; dhammadharo ' versed in the law ' ; sarandgama-
nam * going for refuge * ; veddgu * versed in the law ' ;
jaccandho * born blind * ; apahbajitasadiso * like one who has
given up the world ' ; tadko ' like him ' ; mddiso ' like me * ;
thdlipakko * cooked in a pot.'
The order of the members which form such compounds
may be inversed : addhamdso and mdsaddho ' half a month * ;
pitdmaho * a grandfather.*
JRqjan, sakhd (sak/ri), if employed as last members of a
compound, exhibit all the forms known from the declension.
As first member of a compound rq/an has the base rq/d ; the
only form allowed in the nom. case as last member is rq/d :
rqjabhayam ' fear from a king ' ; Kosalarujd ' king of Kosala.'
Sometimes stems not in use as simple words are employed
as first members. This looks as if a declined stem has
been used; but the dependency is not always such as to
favour such an explanation, e.g. : manasikdro ' attention.'
COMPOUNDS. 77
II. Descriptive Compounds {kammadharaya).
It is of course sometimes difficult to say whether the com-
pound is tappurusa or kammadharaya.
mahanto 'great' takes in composition the weak forms mahd
and mahat, santo * being, good, true,' the weak form sat.
Examples are : nihippalam * blue lotus ' ; sahbaseto * all
white'; j9?"yflr;wraf^o 'speaking kindly'; rajassald 'amenstruous
woman*; sappuriso 'a good man'; saddhammo 'good doctrine';
mahapphalo ' very fruitful ' ; mahdpumo * great virtue ' ;
mahesi ' great sage ' ; hetuppabhavo 'proceeding from a cause';
kacchurakhasd ' scab.'
The adverbial words which are most frequently and
commonly used as prior members of compounds are : or, an,
ana * the negative particle ' ; sm ' well ' ; dus * badly * ; sa
'with.' e.g.: asankhato 'the unconditioned'; anano 'free
from debt ' ; duppuro ' difficult to fill ' ; sucinno ' well done ' ;
saseno ' with an army * ; salajjo ' ashamed.'
ku as former part of many compounds designates inferiority.
It takes the forms : kicd, kad, ku, e.g. : kunnadl * an in-
significant river ' ; kadannam ' bad food ' ; kuditthi ' wrong
view/
Closely related to the preceding class are III. the
Numeral Compounds {digu). The whole is made a neuter
singular.
A sample of this sort of compound is digii, 'itself worth
two cows ' ; further tidandam ' three staves ' ; ticlvaram
' three robes * ; tlham ' three days.*
IV. Adverbial Compounds (abyaylbhdm).
They are also closely related to the Determinative com-
pounds. They are formed in joining prepositions and
adverbs to a noun, and are then used as abstracts, collectives,
and simply adverbially : yathdnicim ' according to one's
pleasure ' ; but yathdrucito * as liked, pleasant ' ; yathdmato
' as if dead ' ; sampahdro ' wounding ' ; aampq/amam
' consciousness * ; apacdro * approach.*
78 PALI GRAMMAR.
V. All the preceding compounds may be used adjectively,
and are then called : Bahuhbihi, e.g. : rltarago * free from
passion * ; but puruso vltardgo ' a man free from passion, an
arhat * ; paTicacakkhu ' the five sorts of vision * ; but as an
epithet of the Buddha, pancacakkhit * man possessing the five
sorts of vision ' ; anupubbam * regular succession * ; but
anupubbo * regular, successive* ; anupubbo nirodho 'successive
destruction.*
In a few cases compounds are fotTned from words not
usually put together, e.g. of adverbs.
vitatho 'false, unreal '=n+^rt^Aa; yathdtatho 'real, true*:=
f/athd+tafhd. e.g. of a phrase : itihdHO * tradition*; itivuttam
or itivuttakam ' name of a book, a legend ' ; ahamahamikam
* conceit of Qw^evioriiy * =.aham-\- aham.
All these compounds were formed before Pali became
a literary dialect.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
II. CHRESTOMATHY.
THE PARITTAM, BEING EXTRACTS
FROM THE SUTTA PITAKAM.
NAMO TASSA :BHAGAyATO AEAHATO SAMMA
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Buddham saranam gaccliiTmi.
Dhammani saranam gacchami.
Saiigham saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami.
Dutiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchiimi.
Tatiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami.
Tatiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami.
Tatiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchami.
SARANAGAMAXAM.
1) Paniitipata veramani sikkhjipadam.
2) Adinnadana veramani sikkhiipadain.
3) Abrahmacariya veramani sikkhapadam.
4) Musavada veramani sikkhapadam.
5) Sura-meraya-majja-pamudatthana veramani sikkha-
padam.
6) Vikalabhojana veramani sikkhapadam.
7) Nacca-glta-vadita-visukadassana veramani sikkhiipadam.
8) Mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhnsanattha-
na veramani sikkhapadam.
6
82 8AMANERAPANHA. DVATTIM8AKABA.
9) UccHsayana-mahiisayana veramanl sikkhapadam.
10) Jiitarupa-rajata-patiggahanii veramani sikkhapadam.
DASASIKKHAPADANI.
* Eka niima kirn ? ' " Sabbe satta iiharatthitika."
* Dve niima kim ? ' " Namanca riipaiica."
' Tini nama kira ? ' " Tisso vedana."
* Cattari niima kira ? ' " Cattari ariyasaccani."
* Pafica niima kim ? ' " Pane' upiidiinakkhandhii."
* Cha nama kira ? ' " Cha ajjhattikiini ayatanani.**
'Satta niima kim ? * " Satta bojjhahgii."
* Attha nama kira ? ' " Ariyo atthahgiko maggo."
* Nava niima kim ? * " Nava sattiiviisii."
' Dasa nama kim ? ' " Dasah' angehi samannagato araMti
vuccati ti."
SAMANERAPANHAM.
Atthi imasmim kiiye : kesa, lomii, nakhii, danta, taco,
mamsam, nahiiru, atthI, atthiminjii, vakkam, hadayam,
yakanara, kilomakam, pihakam, papphiisain, antam, antagu-
nam, udariyam, karlsam, pittam, seraham, pubbo, lohitam,
sedo, raedo, assu, vasii, khelo, einghiinikii, lasika, muttam,
matthake matthaluhgan ti.
DVATTIMSAKAEAM.
Patisankhii yoniso cTvarara patiseviimi yiivad eva sitassa
patighiitiiya unhassa patighiitiiya damsa-makasa-viit&tapa-
sirimsapa-samphassiinara patighatiiya yavad eva hiri-kopina
paticchadanattham. i| 1 1|
Patisankhii yoniso pindapiitara patiseviimi n'eva daviiya na
madaya na mandaniiya na vibhiisaniiya, yiivadeva imassa
kayassa thitiyii yiipanaya vihims(iparatiyii brahmacariylL-
nuggahaya : iti puriinailca vedanam patisaiikhami navanca
PACCAVEKKHANA. DASADHAMMASUTTA 83
vedanam na uppadessJimi, yairU. ca me bhavissati anavajjata
ca phasuvihiiro c&ti. ||2||
Patisankhji yoniso senasanam patisevaml yiivadeva sitassa
patighataya unhassa patighiitiiya darasaraakasavatatapasirira-
sapasamphassanain patighataya yavadeva utuparissiiya vino-
danam patisallanaramattham. ||3||
Patisaukhji yoniso gilanapaccaya-bhesajjaparikkharam pa-
tisevatni yavadeva uppannanam veyyabadhikariara vedana-
nam patighataya abyapajjhaparamataysLti. ||4||
PACCAVEKKHANA.
Evam me sutam : Ekaip saraayaip Bhagava Siivatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi : * bhikkhavo ' ti 'bhadante' ti.
Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca :
"Dasa ime, bhikkhave, dhamma pabbajitena abhinham
pacca vekkh itabba.
Katame dasa ?
1) Vevanuiyamhi ajjhupagato ti pabbajitena abhinham
pacca vekkhitabbam.
2) Parapatibaddha me jivika ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca-
vekkhitabbam.
3) Aiino me akappo karaniyo ti pabbajitena abhinham
pacca vekkhitabbam .
4) Kacci nu kho me attasllato na upavadatiti pabbajitena
abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
5) Kacci nu kho mam anuvicca vinnil sabrahmacari sllato
na upavadantiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
6) Sabbehi me piyehi manapehi njinabhavo vinabhavo ti
pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
7) Kamraassa komhi kamma-dayado kamma-yoni kamma-
bandhu kamma-patisarano, yam kamraam karissami kalyiinam
va papakarn va tassa day ado bhavissamiti pabbajitena abhin-
ham paccavekkhitabbam.
8) Eatham bhutassa me rattindiva vitipatantiti pabbaji-
tena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
84 MAHAMANGALASUTTA.
■ 9) Kacci nu kho 'ham sunnagiire abhiramiimiti pabbajU
tena abhinhara paccavekkhitubbara.
lOj Atthi nu kho rae uttariraanussadhammii alaraan'ya-
nanadassanaviseso adhigato so *hara pacchime kiile sabbrah-
raacarl puttho na manku bhavissiiiuiti pabbajitena abhinham
paccavekkhitubbara.
Ime kho bhikkhave dasa dhammu pabbajitena abhinham
paccavekkhitabba ti.
Idam avoca Bhagavii : attamanii te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bhasitam abhinandun ti.
DASADHAMMASITTTA.
Evam me sutani : Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa arame. Atha kho
afinatara devata abhikkantiiyii rattiya abhikkantavanna
kevalakappam Jetavanam obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten'
upasankami upasankamitva Bhagavantam abhivadetvii
ekamantam atthasi. Ekaraantam ^hita kho sa devata Bhaga-
vantam gathaya ajjhabhasi :
" Bahu deva manussa ca mangalani acintayum
Akankharaana sotthanam : bruhi mahgalara utta-
mam." || 1 1|
* Asevana ca balanam, panditiinafica sevana,
Puja ca pujanlyanam : etam mangalam uttamara.' ||2||
* Patirupa desaviiso ca pubbe ca katapunfiata
Atta sammapanidhi ca : etam mangalam uttamam.' || 3 1|
* Bahusaccafica sipparica vinayo ca susikkhito,
Subhasita ca yii vaca : etam mangalain uttamam.' || 4 1|
* Matapitu upatthiinara putta-diirassa sangaho
Anakula ca kammantii: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||5||
* Diinanca dhammacariya ca fiatakiinanca sangaho
Anavajjani kammani: etam mangalam uttamam.* ||6||
* Arati virati papa majjapiina ca saftftamo
Appamado ca dhammesu: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||7||
RATANASUTTA. ^ 85
* Garavo ca niviito ca santutthi ca katafifiufa
Kiileua dliarama-savanam: etam mangaluni uttamam.* || 8||
* KhantI ca sovacassata saraanananca dassanara
Kalena dhamma-sukacchu: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||9 1|
* Tapo ca brahmacariya ca ari3'a8accana' dassanam
Nibbana-sacchikiriya ca: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||10||
* Phutthassa lokadharamehi cittara yassa na karapati
Asokam virajam khemam: etam mangalam uttamam.' || 11 1|
* Etadisani katviina sabbattha-m-aparajita
Sabbatha sotthim gacchanti: tesam mangalam utamam
ti.' II 12 II
MAHAMANGALASUTTAM.
Yanidha bhutani samagatani
bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe
sabb' evabliiitii suraana bhavantu
atho pi sakkacca sunantu bhasitam. || 1 1|
Tasmahi bhuta nisiimetha sabbe
mettam karotha manusiya pajaya
diva ca ratto ca haranti ye balim
tasmahi ne rakkhattha appamatta. ||2||
Yam kiiici vittam idha va hurara va
saggesu va yain ratanam panltam
na no samam atthi Tathiigatena
idaTn pi buddhe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 3 1|
Khayam viriigam amatam panltam
Yad ajjhagii Sakyamuni samiihito
na tena dhammena sam' atthi kifici.
idam pi dhamme ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. 11 4 11
86 BATANASUTTA.
Yam buddhasettho parivannuyi sucim
samudhim anantarikail Aatn uhu
samadhinu tena samo na vijjati
idam pi dhamme ratanara panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 5 1|
Ye puggalu attha satam pasattha
cattari etani yugani honti
te dakkhineyya Sugatassa siivaka
etesu dinnjini mahapphalani.
idarn pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi botu. || 6 1|
Ye suppayuttji manasii dalhena
nikkcTraino Gotama-siisanamhi
te pattipattii amatam vigayha
laddhji raudha nibbutim bbunjamauii
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 7 1|
Yath' indakhllo pathavira site siyii
catubbhi viitebhi asampakampiyo
tathApamara sappurisara vadami
yo ariyasaccani avecca passati
idam pi sanghe ratanaip panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||8 i|
Ye ariya-saccani vibhavayanti
gam'bhlra-pannena sudesitani
kincapi te honti bhusapparaatta
na te bhavam atthamam jidiyanti
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 9 1|
Sahav* assa dassana-sampadiiya
tay* assu dhammii jahitii bhavanti
sakkilyaditthi vicikicchitanca
sThibbatam va pi yad atthi kifici
catuh' apayehi ca vippamutto
RATANASUTTA. $7
cha cabhitthjlniini abhabbo katum
idam pi saiighe ratanain panltam.
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 10 |j
Kiiicapi so kararaam karoti pilpakam
kciyena vacii uda cetasii va
abhabbo so tassa paticchiidaya
abhabbata ditthapadassa vutto
idam pi sanghe ratanain panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 11 1|
Vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge
gimhana-mase pathamasmim gimhe
tathupamam dhammavaram adesayl
nibbanagarairn pararaam hitiiya
idam pi buddhe ratanain panitani
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 12 1|
Varo varaiifiu varado varaharo
anuttaro dhammavaram adesayl
idam pi buddhe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||13||
Khinara puranam navam n'atthi sambhavam
virattacitta ayatike bhavasmim
te khina-bija avirulhicchanda
nibbanti dhTra yathaj'am padlpo
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 14 1|
Yiinidha bhutani samagatani
bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe
Tathiigatam deva-manussa-pujitam
Buddhara namassiiraa suvatthi hotu. || 15 1|
Yanidha bhutani samagatani
bhummani va yani va antalikkhe
Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitara
dhammam namassama suvatthi hotu. l|16l|
88 KARANlYAMETTASUTTA.
Yitiiidha bhutani saroilgatuni
bhummJini vii yuni va antalikkho
Tathiigatain de vumanussa-puj itam
sangbam namassuma suvattbi hotu. ||17|
RATANA8UTTAM.
Karanlyara attbakusalena
yan tain santara pad am abbisamecca
Sakko uju ca siiju ca
siivaco c'assa mudu anatimual. || 1 1|
Santussako ca subbaro ca
appakicco ca sallabukavutti
santindriyo ca nipako ca
appagabbbo ca kulesu ananugiddbo. ||2|
Na ca kbuddara samiicare kiilci
yena vinnii pare upavadeyyum
sukbino vii kbemino bontu
sabbe satta bbavantu sukbitattu. ||4||
Ye keci panabbut* attbi
tasii vii tbiivarii vii anavasesii
digbii vii ye mabantii vii
majjbimii rassakii anuku tbillii. ||4||
Dittbii vii ye va adittbii
ye ca diire vasanti avidiire
bbiltii vii sambbavesi vii
sabbe sattii bbavantu sukkbitattii. || 5 1|
Na paro param nikubbetba
n&timafinetba kattbaci nam kinci
byarosanii patigba-sannii
n&tlfiamannasa dukkbam iccbeyya. ||6||
Miitii yatbii niyam puttam
iiyusii ekaputtam anurakkbe
KIIANDHAPARITTA. 89
evam pi sabbabhutesu
manasam bhiivaye aparimanam. || 7 1|
Mettafica sabbalokasmira
manasam bhavaye aparimanam
uddham adho ca tiriyanca
asambiidhara averara asapattam. ||8||
Tittham carara nisinno va
sayiino va yavat' assa vigatamiddho
etam satim adhittheyya
brahmam etam viharam idha-m-ahu. ||9||
Dittbiiica anupagamma
sllavii dassanena sampanno
kamesu vineyya gedham
nahi jatu gabbhaseyyam punar etiti. || 10 1|
karanIyamettasuttam.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavji Savatthiyam
vlharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa iiriime. Tena kho pana
samayena Savatthiyam auiiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho
kalankato hoti. Atha kho sarabahula bhikkhu yena Bha-
gava ten' upasaiikamirasu upasankamitvu Bhagavantara
abhivadetvii ekamantam nisldimsu ekamantaiu nisinna kho
te bhikkhu Bhagavantam etad avocum :
* Idha bhante, Savatthiyam aufiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho
kalankato ti.'
"Na ha nuna so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani cattari
ahiiajakuhTni mettena cittena phari. Sace hi so bhikkhave
bhikkhu cattari ahirajakuhTni mettena cittena phareyya : na
hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ahina dattho kiilara kareyya."
Katamani cattari ahirajakuUmi ? Virupakkham ahiraja-
kulain, Eriipatham ahirajakulam Chabyaputtara ahiraja-
kulam Kanhjigotaraakam ahirajakulam.
Na ha nuna so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani cattari ahiraja-
kuliini mettena cittena phari. Sace hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu
90 METTASUTTA.
imitni cattilri ahiiajukulani mcttena cittena pharcyya, na hi
80 bhikkhave bhikkhu ahinii dattho kiilam kareyya.
Anujiinami, bhikkhave, inailni cattiiri ahimjakulani mettena
cittena pharitum : attaguttiya attarakkbiiya attaparittayati.
Idam avoca Bhagava. Idam vatva Sugato athdparaai etad
avoca satthii :
Viriipakkhehi me mettara, mettam Eriipathehi me
Chabyiiputtehi me mettam, mettam Kanhagotamakehi
ca. mil
Apadakehi me mettara, mettam dvipiidakehi me
catuppadehi me mettam mettam bahuppadehi me. ||2||
Ma mam apudako himsi, ma mam himsi dvipadako
ma mam cattuppado himsi ma mam himsi bahuppado. || 3 1|
Sabbe satta sabbe panii sabbe bhuta ca kevala
sabbe bhadrani passantu, ma kinci papam agama ||4||
Appamiino buddho, appamjino dhammo, appamano sangho ;
pamanavantani sirimsapani ahivicchika satapadi unnana-
bhisarabu musika.
Kata me rakkhii, kata me paritta, patikkamantu bhQtani,
so 'ham namo Bhagavato namo sattannam sammasambuddha-
nam.
KHANDHAPARITTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa ariirae. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhii amantesi: "bhikkhave" ti, "bhadante" ti.
Te bhikkhii Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca :
"Mettaya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya, iisevitaya, bhiivitaya,
bahullkatiiya, yanikataya, vatthukataya, anutthitiiya pari-
citaya susamaraddhiiya ekadasdnisarasa patikankhii.
Katame ekadasa ?
1) Sukham supati.
2) sukham patibujjhuti.
8) na pitpakam supinam passati.
METTANISAMSAM. 91
4) manussanam piyo hoti.
6) amanussilnam piyo hoti.
6) devata rakkhanti.
7) nassa aggi va visara vii sattham va kamati.
8) tuvatam cittara saraadhlyati.
9) mukhavanno vippasldati.
10) asammulho kalara karoti.
11) uttarim appativijjhanto brahmalokupago hot! ti.
Mettaj'a, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya asevittiya bhavitaya
baliullkata3'a yanikataya vatthukatiiya anutthitaya paricitaya
susamaraddhaya : ime ekadasanisarasa patikahkhii ti.
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bhasitam abliinandunti.
METTASUTTAM.
Pahuta-bhakkho bbavati vippavuttho saka ghara
bahu nam upajlvaati yo mittanam na dubhati. || 1 1|
Yam yam janapadam yati nigiime rajadhaniyo
sabbattha piijito hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||2|j
Nissa cora pasahanti natimanfieti khattiyo
sabbe amitte tarati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||3||
Akkuddho sagharam eti sabhaya patinandito
natlnam uttamo hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||4||
Sakkatva sakkato hoti garu hoti sagaravo
Tanna-kitti-bhato hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 5 1|
Pujako labhate piijara vandako pativandanara
yasokittinca pappoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||6||
Aggi yatha pajjalati devata va virocati
siriya ajahito hoti yo mittaaam na dubhati. ||7H
Gavo tassa pajiiyanti khette vuttara viruhati
puttanam phalam asnati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||8||
92 MORAPARITTA.
Darlto pabbatiito vil rukkhiito patito naro
cuto patittham labhati yo inittiiuam na dubhati. ||9||
Virulharanlasantiinam nigrodham iva raiiluto
amitta nappasahanti yo raittiinam na dubhatiti. ||10||
METTANISAMSAM.
Udet* ayain cakkhumii ekariijii
ha^rissa-vanno pathavippabhiiso,
tani tam namassarni harissavannam pat.havippabhiisam,
tay' ajja guttii viharemu divasam. || 1 1|
Ye briihraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae
te me namo te ca mam piilayantu,
Nam' atthu buddhilnam, nam' atthu bodhiyii !
namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiyii ! || 2 ||
Imam so parittam katvii, moro carati esanu.
Apet* ayam cakkhuma ekaraja
harissavanno pathavippabhiiso,
tam tam namassarni harissavannam pathavippabhiisam
tay' ajja guttii viharemu rattirn. || 3||
Ye brahraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae
te me namo te ca mam piiUiyantu,
Nam' atthu buddhiinam, nam' atthu bodhiyii!
namo vimuttiinara, namo vimuttiyii ! \\4 |)
Imam so parittam katvii, moro viisara akappayiti.
MORAPARITTA M.
Evam ne sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Siivatthiyara
viharati, Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. Tena kho pana
samayena Candiraii devaputto Riihuhii asurindena gahlto
hoti. Atha kho Candimii devaputto Bhagavantam anussara-
mano tiiyam vehlyara imam giithain abhiisi :
CANDArARITTA. 03
* Namo te Buddha-v!r* atthu I
vippamutto 'si sabbadhi
sambiidha-patipanno 'smi
tassa rae saranam bhavati.' || 1 1|
Atha kho Bhagavii Candimara devaputtam arabbha Eiihum
asurindam gathaya ajjhabbasi.
" Tatbugatam arabantam
Candima saranam gato
Rabu ! Candam pamuncassu
Buddbu lokanukampakati." ||2||
Atba kbo Rabu asurindo Candimam devaputtam muncitvii
taramanarupo yena Yepacitti asurindo ten' upasaukami
upasankamitva samviggo lomabattbajato ekamantam attbasi
ekamantara tbitara kbo Kabum asurindam Vepacitti asurindo
giitbaya ajjbabbiisi :
** Kin nu santaramiino 'va
Eahu ! Candam pamuncasi
samviggarupo agamraa
kin nu bbito 'va tittbasitl." ||3||
* Sattadba me pbale muddba
jivanto na sukbam labbe.
Buddbagiitbabbiglto 'mbi
no ce munceyya Candiman ti. ||4l|
CANDAPARITTA ..
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bbagava Siivattbiyain
vibarati Jetavane Anatbapindikassa arame. Tena kbo pana
samayena Suriyo devaputto Rabunti asurindena gablto boti.
Atba kbo Suriyo devaputto Bbagavantam anussaramauo
tayam velayam imam gatbam abbasi :
' Narao te buddba vir* atlbu !
vippamutto 'si sabbadbi
sambadbapatipanno 'smi
tassa me saranam bbav&ti.' II 1 II
94 SURIYAPARITTA.
Atha kho Bhagava Suriyam devaputtam iirabbha Rahum
asurindam guthiiya ajjhabhusi:
" Tathiigatam arahantam
Suriyo saranam gato
Rahu ! Suriyam pamuncassu
Buddha lokinukampakati." ||2||
" Yo andhakiire tamasi pabharikaro
verocano mandall uggatejo
ma Riihu gill caram antalikkbe
pajam mama Rahu pamufica Suriyan ti." ||3||
Atha kho Riihu asurindo Suriyam devaputtam — pe —
* Sattadhii me phale muddha
jivanto na sukham labhe
Buddhagiithabhigito 'mhi :
no ce muficeyya Suriyan ti.' ||4||
SURIYAPARITTAM.
Evam me sutam. Ekam eamayam Bhagava Siivatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa ariime. Tatra kho
Bhagava bhikkhii jiraantesi "bhikkhavo" ti, "bhadante" ti.
te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad
avoca : || 1 II
" Bhutapubbam, bhikkhave, devasura-sangiirao samu-
pabbniho ahosi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sakko devanam
indo deve Tiivatimse iimantesi :
" Sace, mjiristi, deviinam sangamagatanam uppajjeyya bha-
yam vji chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii mam eva tasmim
samaye dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Mamara hi vo dhajaggam
uUokayatam yam bhavissati bhayam vii chambhitattam va
lomahamso vii so pahlyassati. ||2||
No ce me dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha, atha kho Pajiipatissa
devariljassa dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Pajiipatissa hi fo deva-
riijassa dhajaggam ullokayatara ; yam bhavissati bhayam
vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyissati. || 3 1|
DHAJAOGA PARITTA. 95
No ce Pujjipatissa devariijassa dhajaggain uUokeyyutha,
atha Varunassa devariijassa dhajaggam uUokeyyutha.
Varuuassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam
bhavissati bhayara vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so
pahlyissati. ||4||
No ce Varunassa devariijassa dhajaggam ullokeyyiitha,
atha Isiiuassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyiitha. Isa-
nassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam bha-
vissati bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so
pahlyissati. ||5||
Tam kho pana bhikkhave Sakkassa vii devanam indassa
dhajaggam . uUokayatam : Pajiipatissa vii deviinara riijassa
dhajaggam uUokayatam : Varunassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam
uUokayatam : Isiiuassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam uUoka-
yatam : yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam vii loma-
hamso vii so pahlyetha pi no pahlyetha. II 6 1|
Tam kissa hetu ?
"Sakko, bhikkhave, deviinam indo avitariigo avitadoso
avitamoho bhirucchambhi uttriisi phaliiyiti." [| 7 jj
Ahafica kho bhikkhave evam vadami : " Sace tumhakam,
bhikkhave, arauiiagatiinam va rukkhamulagatanam vii suuna-
giiragatiinam vii uppajjeyya bhayam vii chambhitattam vii
lomahamso vii mam eva tasmim samaye anussareyyiitha :
Iti pi so Bhagava araham samma-sambuddho vijja-carana-
sampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro purisadamma-sarathi
sattha devamanussanam buddho Bhagavii ti. ||8||
Mamam hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati
bhayam vii chambhitattam va lomahamso pahlyissati.
No ce mam anussareyyiitha atha dhammani anussareyyatha :
Sviikkhiito Bhagavatii dhammo sanditthiko akiiliko ehipassiko
opanayiko paccattam veditabbo vinnuhiti. Dhammam hi vo
bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bha3'am va chambhi-
tattam vii lomahamso va so pahlyissati. ||9||
No ce dhammam anussareyyiitha atha sangham anussa-
reyyiitha. Supatipanno Bhagavato savakasangho, ujupati-
panno Bhagavato siivakasahgho, uiiyapatipanno Bhagavato
siivakasahgho, siimlcipatipanno Bhagavato siivakasangho ;
yadidam cattiiri purisayugiiui attha purisapuggalii esa sava-
96 DHAJAGGA TARITTA.
kasangho : iihuneyyo pjihuneyyo dakkhineyyo anjalikaranlyo
anuttaram punna-khettam lokass&ti.
Sangham hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati
bhayani vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso va so pahl-
yissati. ||10||
Tarn kissa hetu ?
TathcTgato hi, bhikkhave, araham samraasambuddho
vltariigo vitadoso vltamoho abhlru acchatnbhi anutrasi
ophahlyiti. ||11||
Idam avoca Bhagavii idam vatvana Sugato athiparam
etad avoca sattha :
"Aranfie rukkha miilevii sunfiagarevji bhikkhavo
anussaretha sambuddham bhayaiu tumhiikam no si^'ii." || 1 1|
" No ce Buddham sareyyatha lokajettham narasabhara :
atha dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikain sudesitam." i|2||
*' No ce Dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam
atha sangham sareyyatha punfiakkhettam anuttaram." j| 3 1|
" Evam Buddham sarantanam dhammam sanghanca
bhikkhavo
bhayatn va chambhitattam vii lomahamso na hessa-
titi>||4ii
DHAJAGGA PARITTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Riijagahe
viharati Veluvane Kalandakaniviipe. Tena kho pana sama-
yena ayasma Mahiikassapo pipphaliguhayam viharati,
abadhiko dukkhito balhagihlno. Atha kho Bhagavii silyan-
hasaraayam patisaUiinii vutthito, yen' iiyasmii Mahiikassapo
ten' upasahkami upasahkamitva pailuatte iisane nisTdi.
Nisajja kho Bhagavii iiyasmantam Makiikassapam etad
avoca :
" Kacci te Kassapa khamanlyam, kacci yapanlyam, kacci
dukkhiivedanii patikkamanti no abhikkamanti. Patikkamo
'fiiinam pariniiya ti no abhikkamo " ti.
MAnAKASSArABOJJHANGA. 97
*Na me, bhante, khamanlyam na yapanlyam balhii me
dukkhitvedanii abhikkamanti no patikkamanti. Abhikkamo
'siinam pafinayati no patikkarao ti.
" Satt' ime, Kassapa, boj jhangii may:! saramJid-akkhJitiT bhii-
vitii bahullkata abhinnjiya sambodhaya nibbaniiya samvattanti.
1) Satisambojjharigo kho, Kassapa, maya saramad-akkhato
bhjlvito baliullkato abhinnaya sambodhaya nibbiinaya
samvattati.
2) Dhammavicayasambojjhango — pe — nibbiinaya sam-
vattati.
3) Viriyasambojjharigo — pe — nibbaniiya samvattati.
4) Pitisarabojjhango — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
5) Passaddhisambojjhango — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
6) Samiidhisambojjhango — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
7) TJpekhasambojjharigo — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
Ime kho Kassapa satta boj jhangii maya sammiidakkhiita
bhavita bahulikata abhiiiuaya sambodhiiya nibbiiniiya sam-
vattanti ti.
* Taggha, Bhagava, bojjhangii, taggha, Sugata, bojjhariga
ti.'
Idam avoca Bhagavii : — attamano iiyasmii Mahiikassapo
Bhagavato bhiisitam abhinandi.
Yutthahi cayasmii Mahiikassapo tamhii iibiidha tatha pablno
c&yasmato Mahiikassapassa so abiidho ahositi.
MAHAKASSAPATTHERABOJJHANGAM.
The Mahdmoggalldnaithera hojjhahgam and the Mahd-
eundatthera hojjhahgam agree with the preceding sutta in all
but the name.
Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagava Siivatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. Tena kho pana
samayena iiyasmii Girimiinando iibiidhiko hoti dukkhito
biilhagihlno. Atha kho iiyasmii Anando yena Bhagavii ten*
upasamkami upasamkamitvii Bhagavantam abhiviidetvti
ekamantam nisldi ekamantam nisinno kho iiyasma Anando
Bhagavantam etad avoca :
98 GIRIMANANDASUTTA.
Ayasma, bhante, Girimjinando abjidhiko dukkhito bajhagi-
lano. Sjidhu bhante Bhagava ; yen* ayasma Girimanando
ten' upasaiikaraatu anukamparn upjiday&ti.
Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno
upasankamitvii dasa sanfia bhaseyyasi. Thiinara kho
pan' etam vijjati yam Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno dasa
sanna sutvii so abildho thiiaaso patippassambheyya.
Katame dasa sannii ?
" Aniccasafina, anattasanna, asubhasannii, adinavasanna,
pahanasanila, viragasannii, nirodhasanfiii, sabbaloke anabhi-
rati sanna, sabbasahkhiiresu aniccasanna, anapanasati."
Katama ca Ananda aniccasaiii'ia ?
" Idh' Ananda bhikkhu, arafinagato va rukkhamulagato
va sunnagjiragato vii iti patisancikkhati : —
Rfipam aniccara, vedanii anicca, sanna anicca, sahkharii
anicca, vinnanam aniccan ti. Iti imesu paiicas' upiida-
nakkhandhesu aniccanupassi viharati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda
aniccasanna. || 1 1|
Katama ca Ananda anattasanna ?
Idh' Ananda — pe — patisancikkhati : —
Cakkhum anatta, rupam anatta, sotara anatta, jivha anatta,
rasa anatta, kayo anatta, photthabba anatta, mano anatta,
dhamraii anattii ti.
Iti ime cbasu ajjhattika-bahiresu iiyatanesu anattanupassi
viharati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda anattasanna. ||2||
Katama ca Ananda asubhasannji? Idh* Ananda bhikkhu
imam eva kiiyam uddham pjidatalii, adho kesamatthakii taca-
pariyantam puram nanappakiirassa asucino paccavekkhati.
Atthi imasmim kjlye : kesa — pe — matthalungan ti. (See
page 82).
Iti imasmim kaye asubh&nupassl viharati. Ayam vuccat*
Ananda asubhasanna. i| 3 1|
Katama ca Ananda adlnavasafiria ? Idh' Ananda — pe —
patisancikkhati.
GIRIMANANDASUTTA. 99
Bahu dukkho kho ayam kiiyo, bahu udlnavo iti imasmim
kaje vividha iibadhji uppajjanti seyyathidain : —
Cakkhurogo, sotarogo, ghiinarogo, jivhiirogo, kiiyarogo,
sisarogo, kannarogo, mukharogo, dantarogo, kuso, siiso,
piniiso, daho, jaro, kucchirogo, mucchu, pakkhandika, sulo,
visQcikii, kuttham, gando, kiliiso, soso, apam;iro, daddu,
kandu, kacchura-khasii, vitacchika, lohitara, pittam, madhu-
meho, amsa, pilaka, bhagandala, pitta-samutthana-abadha,
semha-samutthana-abadha, vata-samutthana-abadha, sanni-
patikii-abadhii, utu-viparinamaja-abadha, visama-pariharajii-
abiidha, opaka-abadha, kammavipilka-abadha, sitam, unbam,
jigbaccha, pipasa, uccaro, passiivo.
Iti imasmim kiiye adinavanupassi vibarati. Ayam vuccat'
Ananda, adlaavasauua. || 4 1|
Katama ca Ananda pabanasanna ? Idb' Ananda bbikkbu
uppannam kama-vitakkam nadbivaseti pajabati, viuodeti
byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam byapildavitakkam nadbivaseti pajabati vinodeti
byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam vihimsavitakkam nadbivaseti pajabati vino-
deti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam uppanne papake akusale dbamme nidbiviiseti
pajabati vinodeti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Ayam vuccat* Ananda pabanasaniia. ||5||
Katama c' Ananda viragasanua ?
Idb' Ananda bbikku — pe — patisancikkbati.
Etam. santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbara-
samatbo sabbClpadbi patinissago tanbakkbayo virago nibba-
^an tL
Ayam vuccat* Ananda viragasanna. ||6||
Katama ca Ananda nirodbasanna ?
Idb* Ananda bbikkbu — pe — patisancikkbati :
Etam santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbiirasamatbo
8abb(^padbi patinissaggo tanbakkbayo nirodbo nibbanan ti.
Ayam vuccat' Ananda nirodbasanila. |j 7 1|
100 GIRIMANANDASUTTA.
Katamii c' Ananda sabbaloke anabhiratisafinii ?
Idh* Ananda bhikkhu ye loke upayupiidana cetaso
adhitthan&bhinivesdnusayil te pajahanto viramati na upadi-
yanto. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabba loke anabhirati sauna, 1| 8 1|
Katama c' Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasafifia ?
Idh' Ananda bhikkhu sabbasankharesu atthiyati harayati
jigucchati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabbasankharesu anicca-
sauua. II 9 II
Katatnii c' Ananda anjipiinasati ?
Idh' Ananda bhikkhu arafinagato vu rukkhamiilagato va
sunnagiiragato \a. nlsldati pallankam abhujitva ujum kayam
panidhaya pariraukkham satim upatthapetva so sate va
assasati sate passasati:
Digham va assasanto digham assasamiti pajiiniiti.
Digham vji passanto digham passasiimiti pajanati.
Rassam va assasanto rassam assasamiti pajanati.
Rassam va passasanto rassain passasiimiti pajanati.
Sabbakayam patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Sabbakayam patisamvedl passasissainiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam kayasankharam assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam kayasankharam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Piti-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Piti-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Sukha- patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Sukha-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Citta-sahkhiira-patisamvedi assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Gitta-sahkhiira-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam cittasahkhiiram assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam cittasankhiiram passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Citta-patisaravedl assasissamiti sikkhati.
Oitta-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Abhippamodayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Abhippamodayam cittam passasissiimiti sikkhati.
ATANATIYASUTTA. 101
Samjidayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Saniadayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Vimocayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati.
Viraocayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
AniccanupassT assasissiimiti sikkhati.
AniccanupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.
ViriiganupassI assasissiimiti sikkhati.
ViriiganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Nirodhanupassi assasissiimiti sikkhati.
NirodhanupassI passasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassT assasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati. —
Ayam vuccat' Ananda aniipiiniisati. ||10|j
Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkhum imii
dasa saiiuii sutva so abadho thanaso patippassambheyyati.
Atha kho ayasma Anando Bhagavato santike imii dasa
sarina uggahetvii : yen' ayasmii Girimanando ten' upasankami
upasankamitvii ayasmato Girimanandassa ima dasa sauna
abhiisi.
Atha kho iiyasmato Girimiinadassa imii dasa sanfiii sutva
so abiidho thanaso patippassambhi.
Vutthahi cayasraii Girimanando tamhii iibiidhii tatha
pahino ca panayasmato Girimanandassa so iibiidho ahositi.
GIRIMANANDASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Riijagahe
viharati Gijjhakiite pabbate. Atha kho cattiiro mahiiriijii
mahatiyii ca Yakkha-seniiya mahatiyii ca Gandhabba-seniiya
mahatiya ca Kumbhanda-seniiya mahatiyii ca Niiga-seniiya
catuddisam rakkham thapetvii catuddisam gumbarn thapetvii
catuddisam avaranam thapetvii abhikkantiiya rattiyii abhik-
102 ATANATIYASUTTA.
kautavannii kevalakappam Gijjhakutam obhasetva : yena
Bhagava ten' upasankamimsu : upasankamitva Bhagavantam
abhiviidetvii ekamantam nisldimsu. fj 1 1|
Te pi kho Yakkha app' ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetva
ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce yena Bhagavata saddhim
sammodimsu saramodanlyara katham saranlyam vltisaretva
ekamantam nisldimsu; app' ekacce yena Bhagava ten' anjalim
panametva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce niima gottam
savetva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce tunhlbhuta eka-
mantam nisldimsu. ||2||
Ekamantam nisinno kho Vessavanno maharaja Bhaga-
vantam etad avoca : —
Santi hi, bhante, ujarji Yakkhji Bhagavato appasanna:
santi hi, bhante, uliinT Yakkha Bhagavato pasannii : santi
hi, bhante, majjhima Yakkha appasanna : santi hi, bhante,
majjhima Yakkha pasanna: santi hi, bhante, nica Yakkhji
Bhagavato appasanna: santi hi, bhante, nIca Yakkha Bha-
gavato pasanna. ||3||
Yebhuyyena kho pana bhante Yakkha appasanna yeva
Bhagavato tam kissa hetu ?
"Bhagava hi, bhante, piinatipata veramaniya dhamraam
deseti ; adinntidana veramaniya dhammam deseti ; kamesu
micchacara veramaniya dhammam deseti ; musavada vera-
maniya dhamraam deseti ; suramerayamajja-pamadatthanii
veramaniya dhammam deseti." || 4 1|
"Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, Yakkha appativirata yeva
panatipiitii, appativirata adinnudanii, appativirata kamesu
micchaciira, appativirata musavjidii, appativirata sura-
merayamajjapamadatthana, tesam tam hoti appiyam amana-
pam."||5||^
"Santi hi bhante Bhagavato savakii arafiue vanapanthani
panthani seniisanjini patisevanti appasaddani appanigghosani
vijanavatani manussa-rahaseyyakani patisallana-siiruppani :
Tattha santi uliira Yakkha niviisino, ye imasmim Bhagavato
pavacane appasanna. Tesam pasiidaya ugganhjitu, bhante,
Bhagava Atanatiyam rakkham bhikkhunarn, bhikkhunlnam,
upasakanam upjisikanam guttiyii rakkhjiya avihirasaya
phasuviharay^ti." Adhivasesi Bhagava tunhlbhavena. Atha
ATANATIYASUTTA. 103
kho Yessavano raahjirajii Bhagavato adhiviisanara viditva
tayam veliiyam imam Atiinatiyam rakkham abhasi : ||6||
Yipassissa nam' atthu cakkhumantassa sirlmato !
Sikkhissa pi nam' atthu sabba-bhutanukampino ! ||1||
Yessabhussa nam' atthu nahjitakassa tapassino !
Nam' atthu Kakusandhassa Milra-sena-pamaddino ! ||2||
Koniigamanassa nam* atthu brahmanassa vuslmato !
Kassapassa nam' atthu vippamuttassa sabbadhe ! || 3 1|
Anglrasassa nam' atthu Sakyaputtassa sirlmato !
Yo imam dhammam adesesi sabba-dukkha pan udunam! ||4||
Ye capi nibbuta loke yathabhutara vipassisum
Te jana apisuna ca mahanta vitasarada
Hitam devamanussanam yam naraassanti Gotamam
Yijjiicarana-sampannam mahantam vltasaradam. i|5||
Yato uggacchati suriyo adicco mandali mahai,
Yassa c'uggacchamanassa samvarl pi nirujjhati,
Yassa c'uggate suriye divaso ti pavuccati. ||6||
Rahado pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako
Evara tarn tattha jiinanti samuddo saritodako
Ito sa purimii disa iti nam acikkhati jano. ||7||
Yam disara abhipaleti mahjiraja yassasi so
Gandhabbiinam adhipiiti Dhatarattho iti namaso
E-amati naccagltehi Gandhabbehi purakkhato. || 8 1|
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam
Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. || 9 1|
Te ca pi Buddham disviina Buddham iidiccabandhunara
Durato va naraassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||10||
Namo te puris&janfia ! namo te puris' uttama !
Kusalena samekkhesi amanussil pi tam vandanti !
Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasma evara vademase. II 1111
Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinara vandjima Gotamam,
Yijjacaranasampannara Buddham vandiima Gotamam! ||12j|
Yena Pefa pavuccanti pisunii pitthiraamsika
Fanatipiitino ludda cora nekatika jana. II 13 1|
104' AT4NATIYASUTTA.
Ito sii dukkhinJI disa. iti nam iicikkhati jano
Yam disam abhipilleti inaliiiraja yasasslso
KurabhandJinam adhipati Virulho iti niima so
Ramati naccagltehi Kurabhandehi pur' akkhuto. II 14 1|
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutain
Asltim dasa eko ca Indanamit mahabbala || 15 |j
Te ca pi Buddhara disvana Buddhara iidicca baiidhunam
Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||16||
Namo te purisajanna ! namo te puris' uttama !
Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti !
Sutain n' etam abhinhaso tasma evam vandemase. || 17 1|
Jinam vandatha Gotamam, jinam vandama Gotamam,
Vijjiicaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam ! II 18 1
Yatha c' uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall maha
Yassa c' uggaccbamanassa divaso pi nirujjhati
Yassa coggate suriye samvariti pavuccati
Kahado pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako
Evam tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako. || 19 1|
Ito sa pacchimji disii iti nam iicikkhati jano
Yam disam abhipiileti mahjinlja yasassi so
Nagiinam ca adhipati Viriipakkho iti niimaso
Kamati naccagltehi Nagehi pur^kkhato. \\20\\
Puttii pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam
Asltim dasa eko ca Indauilma mahabbala. I|21||
Te c&pi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunam
Diirato va namassanti mahantam vitasilradam. || 22 1|
Namo te purisajanna, namo te puris* uttama
Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti
Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasmii evam vandemase ! II23II
Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinam vandiima Gotamam
Vijjiicaranasampannam Buddham vandiima Gotamam !
Yena Uttara-kururammii Mahilmeril Sudassano
Manussii tattha jiiyanti amamii apariggahii. ||24||
ATANATIYASUTTA. 105
IsTa te bljarn pavapanti na pi nlyanti nangala
Akattha-pakimam siilim paribhunjanti manussa. I|25||
Akanam athusam suddham sugandham tandulapphalam
Tundlklre pacitvana tato bhunjanti bhojanam. I|26||
Gavim ekakhuram katvii anuyanti diso disam
Pasum ekakhuram katva anuyanti diso disam
Itthi va vahanam katva anuyanti diso disam
Purisavahanam katva anuyanti diso disam
Kumarlvahanam katva anuyanti disa disam
Kumaravahanam katva anuyanti diso disam. II 27 II
Te yane abhiruhitva sabbadisa anupariyanti pacara tassa
rajino
Hatthi-yiinam assa-ytinam dibba-yanam upattbitam
Pasada sivika c' eva maharajassa yassasi so
Tassa ca nagarH ahu antalikkhe sumapita
Atanata Kusinata Parakusinata Natapuriya Parakusita-
niitS. II 28 II
Uttarena Kuplvanto Janogbam aparena ca
Navanavatiyo Ambara-ambaravatiyo Alakamanda nama
rajadhanl. ||29|i
Kuverassa kho pana, marisa, mabarajassa Yisana nama
rajadhanl
Tasma Kuvero maharaja Yessavano ti pavuccati. |j30||
Paccessanto pakasenti Tatola Tattala Tatotala
Ojasi Tejasi Tatojasi Saroriija Arittho Nemi
Rahado pi tattha DharanI niima yato megha pavassanti
Vassa yato patayanti sabbapi tattha Bhagalavati nama
Yattha Yakkha payirupasanti. ||31 1|
Tattha niccaphahT rukkha namii dijaganayuta
Mayura-koucabhi ruda-kokiladlhi vaggubhi
Jivara-jlvaka sadd' ettha, atho otthava-cittaka
Kukutthaka kullrakii vane pokkharasataka. || 32 1|
Sukasalika-sadd' ettha, dandamanavakiini ca
Sobhati sabbakalam sa Kuvera-nalini sada. 113311
106 ATANATIYASUTTA.
Ito sa uttam disa iti nam acikkhati jano,
Yam disam abhipaleti mahiiraja yasassi so
Yakkhiinam adhipati Kuvero iti niimaso
Kamati nacca-gltehi Yakkhehi pur' akkhato. 1134 II
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka niima ti me sutam
Asltim dasa eko ca Inda nama mahabbula. ||35||
Te capi Buddham disvana Buddham ildicca bandhunam
Durato va namassanti mahantam vitasaradam. ||36||
Namo te puris' ajafiua, namo te puris' uttama
Kusalena saraekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti
Sutam n* etam abhinhaso : tasma evam yandemase ! || 37 1
Jinam vandatba Gotamam ! Jinam vandama Gotamam !
Vijjacarana-sampannam Buddhain vandama Gotamam!
Ayaln klio sii, marisa, Atanatiya rakkha, bhikkhunam
bhikkhunlnam upasakanam upasikanam guttiya, rakkhaya,
avihirasaya, phiisu viharjiya ti. II 7 II
Yassa kassaci, marisa, bhikkhussa va bhikkhuniya va
Tipjisakassa va upasikiiya v& : ayam Atanatiya rakkha sugga-
bita bhavissati samatta pariyaputii tance amanusso Yakkho va
Yakkhinl va Yakkhapotako va Yakkhapotika va Yakkha-
mahamatto va Yakkhaparisajjo va Yakkhapacaro va II 8 II
Gandhabbo va GandhabbI vil — pe — II 9 II
Kumbhando va Kumbhandl va — pe — IIIOU
Nago vii Naglnl va — pe — II 11 II
paduttheicitto gacchantam va anugaccheyya thitam va
upatittheyya, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va
upanipajjeyya. II 12 II
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya giimesu va nigamesu
va sakkarara va garukaram va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Alakamandaya raja-
dhaniya vatthum va vasam va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Yakkhanam samitim
gantum. II 1311
Api 88U nam, marisa, amanussa anavayham pi nam
kareyyum avivayham. Api ssu nam, marisa^ amanussa attahi
ATANATiyASUTTA. 107
pi paripunnahi paribhasiihi paribhaseyyura. Api ssu nam,
miirisa, amanussa rittum pi pattam sise nikkujjeyyum
Api ssu nam, marisa, amanussa sattadha pi assa muddham
phiileyyum. ||14||
Santi hi, marisa, amanussa, candii, rudda, rabhasa, te n' eva
maharajanara adiyanti ; na maharajanam purisakanam adi-
yanti ; na maharajanam purisakanarn purisakanam adiyanti.
Te kho te, marisa, amanussa maharajanam avaruddha nama
vuccanti, seyyathiipi marisa, ||15||
"raiino Magadhassa vijite cora : te n' eva ranno Magadhassa
adiyanti ; na railiio Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti ; na
raiino Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa,
mahacora pi ranno Magadhassa avaruddha nama vuccanti.
Evam eva kho, marisa, santi hi amanussa canda, rudda,
rabhasa : te n' eva maharajanam adiyanti ; na maharajanam,
purisakanam adiyanti, na maharajanam purisakanam adi-
yanti. Te kho 'te, marisa, amanussa avaruddha nama
vuccanti. ||16||
Yo hi koci, marisa, amanusso Takkho va TakkhinI —
pe-||17||
Gandhabbo va Gandhabbi — pe — || 18 1|
Kumbhando va Kumbhandl — pe — ||19||
Nago va Naglnl va — pe — || 20 1|
padutthacitto bhikkhum va bhikkhunim va upasakam va
upasikanam va gacchantam va anugaccheyya, thitam va
upatittheyj'a, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va upani-
pajjeyya, imesam Yakkhanam Mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam
mahasenapatlnam upajjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravi-
tabbam: ||21||
Ayam Yakkho ganhati, ayam Yakkho avisati, ayam
Yakkho hetheti, ayam Yakkho himsati, ayam Yakkho
vihimsati, ayam Yakkho na muficatiti. || 22 1|
Katamesara Yakkhanam Mahayakkhanam sena-patinam,
maha-seua-patlnam ?
Indo Somo Varuno ca Bharadvajo Pajjipati
Cando Karaascttho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca
Panado Opamauuo ca Devasuto ca Matali
108 ATAXATIYASUTTA.
Cittaseno ca Oandhabbo Nalarujii Janesabho
Siitsigiro Ilemavato Punnako Karatiyo Gulo
Sivako Mucalindo ca Vessaraitto Yugandharo
Gopjilo Suppagedho ca Ilirl NettI ca Mandiyo
Pancalacando Alavako Pajjuno Sumano Sumukho
Dadhimukho Mani Miiaicaro Digho Atho Serissako
saha. II 23 II
Imesam YakkhJinam mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam mahii-
senapatlnam ujjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbara
Ayam Yakkho ganhiiti — pe — na rauncatiti. ||24||
Ayam kho sii, marisa, AtiinJitiyii rakkhii bhikkhunara
bhikkhunlnain upasakanam upasikiinara guttiya rakkhaya
avihimstiya phiisuviharayjiti. II 25 II
Handa ca' diini mayam marisa gaccbiima bahukicca mayam
bahukaranlyati. ||26||
Yassa diini tumhe maharjijjino killara maririathElti. II27II
Atha kho cattaro mahiirajaao utthayslsana, Bhagavantam
abhivadetva padakkhinam katva tatth' ev' antaradha-
yimsu. I|28||
Te pi kho Yakkha utthjiyasanji app ekacce Bhagavantam
abhivadetva padakkhinam katvii tatth' ev' antaradhayiinsu.
App* ekacce Bhagavata saddhira sammodimsu sammodani-
yam katham sariinlyara vltisiiretvii tath ev' antaradhayiinsu.
App' ekacce yena Bhagava, ten' aftjalim panametvii tatth'
ev' antaradhiiyimsu.
App' ekacce nilma gottain siivetvii tatth* ev' antaradhayiinsu.
App' ekacce tunhlbhOta tatth' ev' antaradhayimsQti. 1129 j|
" TJgganhJItha, bhikkhave, AtanJitiyam rakkham ! Pariya-
punatha, bhikkhave Atiinatiyam rakkham ! Dharetha, bhi-
kkhave, Atanatiyam rakkhain ! Atthasamhitiiya, bhikkhave,
Atanatiya rakkha bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnain upasakanam
upasikiinam guttiya rakkhaya avihimsaya phasu vilijirjiyati.
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bhasitam abhinandun ti. II 30 II
ATANATIYASUTTAM.
DHAMMACAKKA. 109
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam saraayara Bhagavii Baranasiyam
viharati Isipatane Migadaye. Tatra kho Bhagava panca-
vaggiye bhikkhu iimantese: || 1 1|
"Dve 'me, bhikkhave, anta pabbajitena na sevitabbiii.
Katarae dve?
*Yo c^yam kjimesu kiimasukhallikanuyogo hino gammo
pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasamhito ; yocayam atta-kilama-
th&nuyogodukkhoanariyoanatthasamhito; — etekhobhikkhave
ubho ante anupagamma majjhima patipadii Tathagatena
abhisarabuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-
fiuiiya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati.' ||2 1|
Katamii ca sa bhikkhave majjhima patipada Tathagatena
abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi-
nniiya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati ?
" Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo, seyyathidam : Sam-
maditthi, saramasankappo, sammaviica, sammiikammanto,
Bammiiajlvo sammiivayamo, sammilsati, sammiisamadhi. ||3||
Ayam kho sii, bhikkhave, majjhima patipada Tathagatena
abhisambuddhji cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhifi-
naya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati. ||3||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhara ariyasaccam : jati pi
dukkhii, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha, maranam pi
dukkham, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo
dukkho, yam pi icchara na labhati tam pi dukkham —
sankhittena pane' upiidanakkhandha dukkha. ||4||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudayam ariya-
saccam: yjiyam tanhaponobbhavikii nandi-riiga-sahagata tatra
tatrabhinandini, seyyathidam : Kamatanha,bhavatanha, vibha-
vatanha. ||5||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam,
yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesa-viriiga-nirodho cago patinissago
mutti analayo. ||t>||
110 DHAMMACAKKA.
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagilminl pati-
pada ariyasaccam.
Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo : seyyathidam samraa-
ditthi — pe — sammiisaraadhi. || 7 II
Idam dukkhara ariyasaccan ti me, bhikkhave,
pubbe ananussutesu dhamraesu cakkhura udapiidi, ilii-
nam udapiidi, pafinu udapadi, vijjii udapadi, aloko
udapadi. i|8||
Tam kho pan' idam dukkham ariyasaccam parifiiieyan ti
me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu — pe —
parinnutan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu
cakkhum udapiidi, niinam udapiidi, panfla udapiidi, vijja
udapiidi, aloko udapiidi. ||9||
Idam dukkhasamudayara ariyasaccam ti me, bhikkhave,
— pe — aloko udapiidi. ||10||
Tam kho pan' idam dukkhasamudayara ariyasaccam
pahiitabban ti me bhikkhave — pe — pahlnan ti me bhi-
kkhave — pe — iiloko udapiidi. ||11||
Idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam ti me bhikkhave
— pe — iiloko udapiidi. || 12 1|
Tam kho pan' idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam sacchi-
katabban ti me bhikkhave, — la — sacchikatan ti me, bhi-
kkhave, — pe — iiloko udapiidi. || 13 1|
Idam dukkhanirodhagiimini patipadii ariyasaccan ti me,
bhikkhave, — pe — iiloko udapiidi. || 14 1|
Tam kho pan' idam dukkhanirodhagiimini patipadii
ariyasaccan bhavetabban ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — bhiivitan
ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — iiloko udapiidi. ||15||
Yiiva klvafica me, bhikkhave, iraesu catusu ariyasaccesu
evam ti-parivattara dviidasii-kiiram yathiibhutam niinadassa-
nam na suvisuddham ahosi : n'eva tavaham bhikkhave
sadevake loke samiirake sabrahmake, sassamanabriihmaniyii
pajiiya sadevamanussiiya anuttaram sammiisambodhim abhi-
sambuddho paccafifiilsim. ||16||
Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu
evam tiparivattara dviidasiikiiram yathiibhiitara fiiinadassanam
suvisuddham ahosi, athaham, bhikkhave, sadevake loke sama-
rake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmanlyii pajiiya sadevama-
DHAMMACAKKA. HI
nussiiya anuttaram sammusambodhim abhisambuddbo ti
paccannasim. 111711
Nanauca pana me dassanam adapadi : * Akuppa me
ceto-vimutti, ayam antimu jati, n'atthi dani punabbhavo
ti/ II 18 II
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana pancavaggiya bhikkbu
Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandanti. || 19 1|
Imasmim ca pana veyyakaranasmim bbanfiamane ayasraato
Kondannassa virajam vltaraalam dhammacakkhum udapildi :
* Yam kinci samudaya-dhammam sabbam tarn nirodha-
dhamraanti.' ||20||
Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata dhammacakke Bbumma deva
saddam anussavesum : * Evam Bhagavata Biiranasiyam Isi-
patane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam,
appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va
Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci lokasmin ti.' I|21||
Bhummanam devanam saddam sutva Catumaharajika deva
saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||22 1|
Catumaharajikanam devanam saddam sutva, Tavatimsa
deva saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||23||
Yam a deva — pe — . ||24||
TusitJi devji — pe— . ||25|j
Nimmanarati deva — pe — . ||26||
Paranimmitavasavattino deva — pe — . ||27||
Brahmaparisajja deva — pe — . ||28||
Brahmapurohita deva — pe — . ||29|j
Mahiibrahraa deva — pe — . || 30 1|
Parittabha deva — pe — . || 31 |j
Appamanabha deva — pe — . ||32li
Abhassara deva — pe — . || 33 1|
Parittasubha deva — pe — . ||34||
Appamanasubha deva — pe — . || 35 li
Subhakinnii deva — pe — . I|36||
Vehapphala deva — pe — . || 37 II
Asannasatta deva — pe — . || 38 1|
Avihti deva — pe — . || 39 1|
Attappa deva — pe — . ||40|(
Sudaasa deva — pe — . ||41 1|
112 MAIIASAMAYASUTTA.
SudassT devil — pe — . ||42||
Akanitthii deva — pe — . ||43||
Evam Bhagavata Biiranasiyam Isipatane Migadiiye anutta-
ram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii
brjihraanena vji devena va Marena vii Brahmunii vii kenaci
vii lokasmin ti. || 44 1|
Iti ha tena khanena tena layena tena rauhuttena yiiva
Brahmalokii saddo abbhuggafichi, ayanca kho dasasahassi-
lokadhiitu sahkampi, sarapakarapi, sampavedhi ; appainiino ca
uliiro obhiiso loke piiturahosi atikkamma deviinam devanu-
bbiivan ti. ||45||
Atha kho Bhagavii udiinam udiinesi : "Anniisi vata bho
Kondafino, afifiiisi vata bho Kondanno ti." ||46||
Iti hi' dara iiyasmato Kondanfiassa Aiiniitakondarifio tv eva
namam ahosi. ||47i|
DHAMMACAKKAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu
viharati Kapilavatthusmim mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu-
sarighena saddhira paficamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva
arahantehi dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi devatii yebhuyyeua sanni-
patita honti, Bhagavantam dassaniiya bhikkhusanghanca. || 1 1|
Atha kho catunnam Suddh&viisa-kiiyikauam devanam etad
ahosi : —
" Ayarn kho Bhagavii Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim
mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu-sanghena saddhim paficamattehi
bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva arahantehi, dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi
devatii yebhuyyena sannipatitii honti, Bhagavantam dassa-
naya bhikkhu-sanghafica. Yan niina mayam pi yena Bha-
gavii ten' upasasankameyyiima, upasankamitvii Bhagavato
santike paccekam giitham bhiiseyyiimati." || 2 1|
Atha kho tii devata seyyathiipi niima balavii puriso
MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 113
samminjitam va baham pasareyya pasaritara va baham
samminjeyya evam evam kho Suddhslvasesu devesu antara-
hita Bhagavato purato paturahamsu. ||3||
Atha kho ta devatii Bhagavantam abhivadetvji ekam-
antam attharasu : ekamantam thitii kho eka devatii Bhaga-
vato santike imam gatham abhasi :
" Mahasaraayo pavanasmim
deva-kaya samagata !
AgatamhcT imam dhammasamayam
dakkhitaye aparajitasanghan" ti. || 1 1|
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham
abhasi :
" Tatra bhikkhavo samadahamsu
cittam attano ujukam akamsu
Sarathi va nettiini gahetva
indriyani rakkhanti pandita " ti. ||2||
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham
abhasi :
" Chetva khilam chetva paligham
indakhllam uhaccam aneja
Te caranti suddha vimala
cakkhumata sudanta susunag^" ti. ||3||
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam giitham
abhasi :
" Ye keci buddhara saranam gatase
na te gamissanti apayam
Pahaya manusam deham
devakayam paripuressanti " ti. || 4 1|
Atha kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi :
" Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhjitusu devata
sannipatita Tathagatam dassanaya bhikkhu sahghanca. Ye
pi te, bhikkhave, ahesum atitain addhanam arahanto samma-
sambuddha, tesara pi Bhagavantiinam ete paramii yeva devata
sannipatita ahesum, seyyatha pi mayham etarahi. Ye pi to,
bhikkhave, bhavissanti aniigatara addhanam arahanto samma-
sambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva
8
114 MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
devata sannipatita bbavissanti, seyyatha pi mayham eta-
rahi." II 5 II
" AcikkhissJimi, bhikkhave devakJiyJinara niimani, kitta-
ylssami, bhikkhave, devakayjinam niimani, desissiitni, bhi-
kkhave, dcvakayjinam niimani. Tarn suniitha, sildhukam
manasikarotha bhiisissjimiti. ||6||
" Evara bhante ! " ti. Te bhikkhn Bhagavato paccasso-
sum. BhagavcT etad avoca: ||7||
** Silokam anukassiimi, yathii bhummii tad assita
Ye sitii girfgabbharam pahitattti samahitii
Puthu sihii va salllnii lomaharasabhisambhuno
Odiita manasti saddhil vippassanara aniivila
Bhiyo pauca-sate iiatvii vane Kiipilavatthave. Ill ||
Tato iimantayi satthii siivake siisane rate :
Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijaniitha bhikkhave ?
Te ea atappam akarum sutvii Buddhassa siisanam
Tesam piitur ahu nanam amanussilna dassanam. ||2||
App' eke satam addakkhum sahassam atha sattati
Satam eke sahassiinain araanussiinam addarasu
App eke 'nantam adakkhum disii sabba phutii ahu
Tafica sabbam abhinfiiiya pavakkhitviina cakkhumii
Tato amantayi satthii siivake siisane rate :
Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijiiniitha bhikkhave ?
Ye vo 'ham kittayissiimi giriihi anupubbaso. || 3 1|
Sattasahassii Yakkhii ea bhummii Kiipilavatthavii
Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamiinii abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. ||4||
Cha sahassii Hemavatii Yakkhii niinatta-vannino
Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamiinii abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va-
naro. 1)5 1|
Satagirii ti-sahassil Yakkhii — pe — . ||6||
Ice ete solasa sahassa Yakkhii — pe — . ||7||
Vessamittil paflca satii Yakkhii — po — . || 8 II
MAHASAMAYASUTTA. Hg
Kumbhiro Riijagahiko Vepullassa nivesanam,
Bhiyo nam satasahassam Yakkliunara payirupasati,
Kumbhiro Rajagahiko so p' iiga samitim vanara. ||9||
Puriraaiica disam riijii Dhatarattho tam pasiisati
Gandhabbiinarn adhipati mahariijii yasassi so.
Puttii pi tassa bahavo indanama mahabbala
Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino
Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. moil
Dakkhinanca disam raja Virulho tam pasiisati
Kumbhandanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so
Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 11 II
Pacchimanca disam raja VirOpakkho tam pasiisati
Niigiinauca adhipati mahiiriijii yasassi so.
Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 12 1|
Uttarafica disam riija Kuvero tam pasiisati
Yakkhanain adhipati mahariija yasassi so
Putta pi tassa — pe — . || 13 il
Purimam disam Dhatarattho, dakkhinena Virulhako
Pacchimena Virupakkho, Kuvero uttaram disam
Cattaro te maharaja samantii caturo disa
Daddallamana attharasu vane Kiipilavatthave. I|14||
Tesam mayiivino dasii agu vancanika sathii
Maya Kutendu Vetendu Vitucca Yitucco saha
Candano Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca
Paniido Opamanrio ca devasuto ca Miitali
Citta-Seno ca Gandhabbo Nalaraja Janesabho
Agum Pancasikho ceva Timbaru Suriyavaccasa
Ete c' aiine ca riijiino Gandhabbii saha riijubhi
ModamiiDa abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. II15II
Ath^gu Niibhasii Naga Yesala saha Tacchaka
Kambalassatara iigu Payiigii saha niitibhi,
Yilmunii Dharattha ca iigu Niigii yasassino
Eriivano Mahauilgo so p' iigu samitim vanam. II 16 j|
116 MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Ye nagaraje sahasa haranti
dibba dvijii pakkhi visuddhacakkhu
vehasaya te vana-majjlia-pattii
Citta Supanna iti tesam naraam
abhayam tadii Nagarajanam asi
Supannato khemara akasi Buddho
Sanhiihi viicJihi upavhayanta
NagcT Supanna saranam againsu Buddham. ||171l
Jita vajira-hatthena samuddara asiira sita.
Bhataro Vasavas* ete iddhimanto yasassino.
Kiilakanja mahahimsa asura Danaveghasa
Vepacitti Sucitti ca Paharado Namuci saha
Satafica Baliputtanam sabbe verocanamaka
Sannayhitva balim senam Rahubhaddam upagaraum
Samayo dani, bhadante, bhikkhunam samitim va-
nam. ||18|(
Apo ca deva Pathavl Tejo Yayo tad agamum
Varuna Varuna deva Somo ca Yasasii saha
Mettakaruna-kayika agu deva yasassino
Das' ete dasadhakayii sabbe nanatta-vannino
Idhiraanto — pe — samitim vanam II 19 II
Venhu ca deva Sahall ca Asama ca duve Yama
Candass* upanissii deva candam agu purakkhatvii
Suriyass* upanissa deva suriyam agu purakkhatva
Nakkhattani purakkhatva ilgu mandavalahaka
Vasunam Yasavo settho Sakko p' iigu Purindado
Das' ete dasadbakaya sabbe nanatta-vannino
Iddhimanto — pe — samitim vanam. II 20 II
Ath' iigu Sahabhu deva jalam aggi sikhii-r-iva
Aritthaka ca Roja ca Umraa-puppha-nibhiisino ;
Yaruna saha Dhammii ca Accutii ca Anejaka
Suleyya Pucirii agu, iigu Yasavanesino
Das' ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 21 II
Samanii Mahasamanii Miinusainanusuttama
Khiddapadusika agu, iigu Manupadusikii
MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 117
Ath&gu Harayo devii ye ca Lohitavasino
Piiragii Mahiiparagii iigu deva yasassino
Das *ete dasadhii kiiyii — pe — saraitim vanam. || 22 II
Sukhii Karumha Arunii agu Yeghanasa saha
Odatagayhii Pamokkha agu deva Vicakkhana
Sadiimatta Haragaja Missaka ca yasassino
Thanayara agu Pajjunno yo disa abhivassati :
Das' ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 23 II
Khemlyii Tusita Yiiraa Katthakii ca yasassino
Larabitakii Liimasettha Joti nama ca Asava
Nimmanaratino agu ath' agu Paranimmita
Das' ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 24 II
Satth' ete deva-nikaya sabbe nanatta-vannino
Nama-dvayena aganchum ye c' aniie sadisa saha :
* Pamutthajjitim akhllara oghatinnam anasavam
Dakkhem' oghataram Nagam candam va asitatigam.' II 25 II
Subrahma Paramatto ca putta iddhimato saha
Sanam kumaro Tisso ca so p' agu samitim vanam. II 26 II
Sahassa Brahmalokanam Mahabrahma bhititthati
Upapanno jutimanto bhismakayo yasassl so. II 27 II
Das' ettha issara agu pacceka-vasavattino ;
Tesaiica majjhato agu Harito parivarito. II 28 II
Te ca sabbe abhikkante sa-Inda-deve sa-brahmake
Marasena abhikkami : Passa kanhassa mandiyam. || 29 1|
* Ettha ganhatha bandhatha ragena bandham atthu ve
Samanta parivaretha ma vo muficittha koci nam.' || 30 1|
Iti tattha mahaseno kanhasenam apesayi
Panina talam ahacca saram katvana bheravam
Yatha pavussako megho thanayanto savijjuko
Tada so paccudavatti sankuddho asayam vasl. I|31||
Tauca sabbam abhinnaya pavakkhitvana cakkhumu
Tato amantayi sattha siivake siisane rate :
Marasena abhikkantu te vijanatha bhikkhavo P
118 ALAVAKASUMTA.
Te ca atappam akalrum sutvii Buddhassa sasanam.
Yitariigeh' apakkamum na sam lomam pi iujayum. || 32 1|
Sabbe vijita sarigamii-bhay&bhita yasassino
Modanti saha bhutehi suvaku te jane sutati. i|33||
MAHASAMAYASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDHASSA.
Evam me sutara : Ekam saraayam Bhagava Alaviyam
viharati Alavakassa Yakkhassa bhavane. Atha kho Alavako
Yakkho yena Bhagava ten' upasahkami upasankamitva Bha-
ga van tarn etad avoca :
" Nikkhama samanH " ti.
" * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkhami.
" Pavisa samani " ti.
" * Sadh&vuso ' " ti. Bhagavii pavisi.
Dutiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca :
*' Nikkhama samana " ti.
" * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkliami.
" Pavisa samana " ti.
" 'Sadhavuso * " ti. Bhagava pavisi.
Tatiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca:
" Nikkhama samana " ti.
" * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkhami.
" Pavisa samanaL " ti.
" ' Sadhavuso * ** ti. Bhagava pavisi.
Catutthara pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad
avoca : " Nikkhama samana " ti.
" 'Na kho pan&ham avuso nikkhamissiimi. Yan te karanl-
yam tarn karohi * " ti.
"Paiihara tam samana pucchissami. Sace me na bya-
karissasi, cittam va te khipissami, hadayain va te phalessami,
padesu va gahetva param Gangaya khipissami ti."
AI.AVAKASUTTA. 119
" 'Na khviiham tain, avuso, passilmi sadevake loke, sama-
rake, sabrahmake, sassaraana bruhmaniya pajiiya sadevama-
nussjiya, yo me cittam vii khipeyya, hadayara vii phaleyya,
padesu vii gahetvji pjiram Gangiiya khipeyya. Api ca tvam
avuso puccha yadu kankhasi ' " ti.
"Xim sMha vittam purisassa settham? kimsu sucinno
sukham avahati ?
Kimsu have siidhutaram rasaaam ? katham jivim jivitam
ahu setthan ? " ti. || 1 1|
" * Saddh' idha vittam purisassa settham, dhammo sucinno
sukham avahati,
Saecam have sadhutaram rasanam, parina jIvim jivitam
ahu setthan'" ti. ||2||
" Kathamsu tarati ogham ? kathain tarati annavam ?
Kathamsu dukkham acceti ? kathamsu parisujjha-
titi?"||3||
" * Saddhaya tarati ogham, appamadena annavam,
Viriyena dukkham acceti, pafinaya parisujjhati. ' " ||4||
" Kathamsu labhate patinam ? kathamsu vindate dhanam?
Kathamsu kittim pappoti? katham mittani gantheti ?
Asma loka param lokam katham pecca na socati ? " || 5 1|
" ' Saddahauo arahatam dhammam nibbanapattiya
Sussusam labhate parliiam appamatto vicakkhano.
Patirupakarl dhurava vutthata vindate dhanam
Saccena kittim pappoti dadam mittani ganthati,
Asmii loka param lokain evam pecca na socati.
Yass' ete caturo dhammil saddhassa gharamesino
Saecam dhammo dhiti cago sa ve pecca na socati.
Ingha anne pucchassu puthu samanabriihmane
Yadi sacca dama caga khanty&bhiyyo' dha vijjati. ' " ||6|I
" Katham nu dani puccheyyam puthu samanabriihmane
Sv4ham ajja pajanami so attho saraparayiko.
Atthaya vata mo Buddho viisayalavim itgato
120 PARABHAVASUTTA.
Yo* ham ajja pajanami yattha dinnam roahapphalam
So aham vicarissami giirailgamam purapurara
Naraassaraano sambuddham dhammassa ca sudham-
matan" ti. II7II
ALAVAKASUTTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Savatthiyara
viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa ariime. Atha kho ailfia-
tara devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavannii kevala-
kappam Jetavanam obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten* upa-
sankami upasahkaraitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekaman-
tani atthasi, ekamantara thita kho sa devata Bhagavantam
gathaya ajjhabhasi.
** Parabhavantam purisam mayam pucchiima Gotaraarn
Bhagavantam putthum iigamma kim parabhavato
mukham?" ||i||
** * Suvijiino bhavam hoti, suvijano parjlbhavo
Dhammakamo bhavam hoti, dhammadessi parabha-
vo.'"||2||
" Iti h' etam vijaniima : pathamo so pariibhavo
Dutiyam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?"||3||
" * Asant* assa piyji honti, sante na kurute piyam
asantam dhammam roceti tam parabhavato mu-
kham.'" II 4 II *
"Iti h' etam vijjinaraa : dutiyo so pariibhavo
tatiyam Bhagava bruhi: kim parabhavato mukham?" || 5 1|
" * Niddasill sahJisTli anutthatii ca yo naro
alaso kodhapannjito, tam parabhavato mukham.' " ||6||
" Iti h' etam vijaniiraa : tatiyo so pariibhavo
catuttham Bhagavii bruhi : kim pariibhavato mu-
kham?" 1I7||
rARABHAVASUTTA. 121
" * Yo miltaram vii pitaram va jinnakaip gata-yobbanam
pahusanto na bharati, tarn pariibhavato mukham.*" ||8||
" Iti h* etam vijaniiraa : catuttho so parabhavo
paucamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?" |!9||
" ' Yo brahraanam va samanam va annam va pi vanibba-
kam
rausavadena vaBceti, tam parabhavato raukham.' " || 10 1|
" Iti h' etam vijanama : paiicamo so parabhavo
chattham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
"kham?" 1|11||
" * PahQvitto puriso sa-hiranno sa-bhojano
eko bhufijati sadhuni, tam parabhavato mukhara.' " ||12||
** Iti h' etam vijanama : chattho so parabhavo
sattamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?"||13||
" * Jatitthaddho, dhanatthaddho, gottatthaddho ca yo naro
tam iiatim atimafineti, tam parabhavato mukham.' " I|14||
" Iti h' etam vijanama : sattamo so parabhavo
Attham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mukham ? " ||15I|
" ' Itthidhutto, suradhutto, akkhadhutto ca yo naro
laddham laddhara vinaseti, tam parabhavato mu-
kham.'" ||16*l|
" Iti h' etam vijanama : atthamo so parabhavo
navamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?" || 17 1|
* " Sehi darehi santuttho vesiya upadissati
dissati paradaresu, tam parabhavato mukham.*" ||18||
" Iti h' etam vijanamo : navamo so parabhavo
dasamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?" || 19 1|
** * Atlta-yobbano poso aneti timbarutthanim
tassa issa na supati, tam parabhavato mukham.'" ||20||
122 VASALASUTTA.
" Iti h' etam vijaniima : dasamo so parabhavo
ekiidasamam Bhagavu briihi : kim parjibhavato mu-
kham?"||21||
" * Itthl-sondim vikiranim purisara vJi pi tadisam
issariyasmim thiipeti tarn pariibhavato mukham.' " ||22||
" Iti h' etam vijaniima : ekiidasamo so parabhavo
dvadasamarn Bhagava briihi: kirn pariibhavato mu-
kham ?" |l 23 1|
'* ' Appabhogo raahiitanho khattiye jiiyate kule
so 'dha rajjam patthayati : tam pariibhavato mu-
kham.'" || 24 1|
*' * Ete pariibhave loke pandito samavekkhiya
ariyo dassana-sarapatto salokam bhajate sivau'" ti. ||25||
PARABHAVASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AUAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evarn me sutam : Ekara samayara Bhagava Siivatthiyam
viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. Atha kko
Bhagava pubbanha samayara nivasetvii pattaclvaram iidiij'a
Siivatthiyam pindiiya piivisi. Tena kho pand saraayena
Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesane aggi pajjalito
hoti iihuti paggahitii. || 1 1|
Atha kho Bhagavii Siivatthiyam sapadiinam pindiiya cara-
mano, yena Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesanam,
ten' uppasankami. ||2|| Addasii kho Aggika-Bhiiradviijo
briihmano Bhagavantam dilrato agacchantara disviiua Bha-
gavantam etad avoca :
" Tatr' eva mundaka, tatr' eva samanaka, tatr' eva vasalaka
titthiThi ti." || 3 1|
Evam vutte Bhagava Aggika-Bhiiradviijam briihraanam
etad avoca :
VASALASUTTA. 123
" * Junilsi pana tvam briihmana, vasalam va vasala-karane
va dhamrae ti.' " ||4||
"Na khvaham, bho Gotaraa, janjimi vasalam va vasala-
karane vii dhamme ti. Sadhu me bhavam Gotamo tatha
dhammara desetu : yathaham janeyyam vasalam va vasala-
karane va dhamme ti."
" * Tena hi, brahraana, sunahi siidhukam manasikarohi
bhasissami ti.' " || 5 (I
"Evam bho" ti kho Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmauo Bha-
gavato paccassosi. Bhagava etad avoca : || 6 11
Xodhano upanahl ca papamakkhi ca yo naro
vipannaditthi mayavl, tarn jafina vasalo iti. II 1 II
Ekajam va dijam va pi yo 'dha panani himsati.
yassa pane daya n'atthi, tarn jaiifia vasalo iti. ||2||
Yo hanti parirundhati giimani nigamani ca
niggahako samannato, tarn janiia vasalo iti. ||3||
Game va yadi varanfie yam paresam mamayitam
theyya adinnam adiyati, tarn jafifia vasalo iti. ||4||
Yo have inara adiiya vuccamano palayati
na hi te inam atthiti, tarn janna vasalo iti. ||5||
Yo ve kincikkha-kamyata panthasmim vajatam janam
hantva kincikkham adeti, tarn janiia vasalo iti. ||6||
Yo attahetu parahetu dhanahetu ca yo naro
sakkhiputtho musabruti, tarn jaiina vasalo iti. ||7||
Yo natinam sakhanam va daresu patidissati
sahasa sampiyena va, tarn janna vasalo iti. ||8||
Yo mataram vii pitaram va jinnakam gatayobbanam
pahusanto na bharati, tarn janna vasalo iti. ||9 1|
Yo mataram va pitaram va bhiitaram va bhaginim
sassum hanti roseti va, tam janna vasalo iti. || 10 1|
Yo attham pucchito santo anattham anusiisati.
paticchantena manteti, tam janna vasalo iti. || 1111
124 VASALASUTTA.
Yo katvii piipalcam karamam * mji mam jafifiil ' ti icchati
80 paticchaiina-kammaiito, tarn junnii vasalo iti. ||12||
Yo ve parakulam gantva bhutvana sucibhojanam
agatam na patlpujeti, tam jafifia vasalo iti. ||13||
Yo briibraanam vii samanain va anuam va pi vanibbakara
musavadena vanceti, tarn jafifia vasalo iti. ||14||
Yo brahmanam va samanam va bbattakale upattbite
roseti vaca na ca deti, tam janfia vasalo iti. ||15||
Asatam yo 'dba pabriiti mobena paliguntbite
kincikkbam nijigimsano, tam janna vasalo iti. ||16||
Yo c'attanarn samukkamse parafica avajanati
nibino sena manena, tain janna vasalo iti. || 17 1|
Rosako kadariyo ca papiccho maccbarl satbo
abiriko anottapl, tain janfia vasalo iti. ||18(|
Yo buddbam paribhiisati atba va tassa savakam
paribbajam gabattham. va, tam janna vasalo iti. ||19||
Yo ve anaraba santo, arabam patijiiniiti
coro sabrabraake loke esa kbo vasaladbamo !
ete kbo vasala vutta may a vo ye pakasitii. || 20 1|
Na jacca vasalo hoti, na jacca boti brabmano
kammana vasalo boti, kammana boti brabmano. ||21||
Tadamina pi jantitba yatba me 'dam nidassanam :
" CandJilaputto Sopiiko Miitango iti vissuto. ||22[|
So yasam paramam patto Miitango yam sudullabbam
agancbum tass'upatthanamkbattiya brahmanjibabu. H23||
So devayjinam iiruyha virajam so mabiipatbam
kamaragam virajetva brabmalokupago iibu. ||24||
Na nam jiiti nivjiresi brabraalokQpapattiya,
ajjbiiyakiikule jiita brahmanii mantabandbuno : || 25 1|
Te ca papcsu kammesu abhinbain upadissare
dittb 'eva dbamrae garayhii sampariiye ca duggatim
na te jati nivareti duggacca garabaya va: " ||26||
kasIbharadvajasutta. 126
Na jacca vasalo hoti, na jacca hoti brahmano
kammana vasalo hoti, kammana hoti brahmano. ||27||
Evam vutte Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bhagavantain
etad avoca :
" * Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Gotama !
nikkujjitain va ukkujjeyya, paticchannarn va vivareyya,
inu}hassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam
dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhinantiti : evam eva
bhota Gotamanena aneka pariyayena dhamrao pakasito.
Es^hain Bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchami dham-
manca bhikkhusahghaiica ! Upasakam mam bhavam Gotamo
dharetu, ajjatagge panupetam saranam gatan ti ' " ! || 7 li
VASALASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AEAHATO SAMMA
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Magadhesu
viharati Dakkhiniigirismiin Ekanalayam brahmanagiime. || 1 1|
Tena kho pana samayena Kasibharadviijassa brahmanassa
paiicamattani nangala-satiini payuttani honti vappakiile. ||2||
Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasaraayam nivasetva patta-clva-
ram adaya yena Kaslbhilradvajassa brahmanassa kammanto,
ten' upasafikami. || 3 1| Tena kho pana samayena Kasibha-
radviijassa brahmanassa parivesana vattati. ||4|| Atha kho
Bhagava yena parivesanii ten' upasankami upasankamitva
ekamantam atthasi. addasa kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano
Bhagavantam etad avoca :
"Aham kho, samana, kasami ca vaparai ca, kasitvii ca
vapitva ca bhunjami. Tvam pi samana kasassu ca vapassu
kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjassu ti."
" * Aham pi kho, briihmana, kasiimi ca vapami ca kasitvii
ca vapitva ca bhunjiimi ti.' "
" Na kho pana mayam passiima bhoto Gotamassa yugara
vii nangalam vii phiilam va piicanam vu balivaddam vii."
126 kasTbharadvajasutta.
Atha ca pana bhavam Gotamo evain aha : —
" * Aham pi kho brahmana kasaini ca vapiitni ca kasitva
ca vapitva ca bhunjiiiniti.' "
Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo briihraano Bhagavantam gathaya
ajjhabhiisi: \\b\\
" Kassako patijanasi na ca passama te kasim
kasino pucchito bruhi, yatha janemu te kasim." || 1 1|
" * Saddha bijam, tapo vutthi, panfia me yuga-nangalara
hirim Tsii, mano yottam, sati me phiilapaeanam. ||2||
Kiiyagutto vacTgutto iihare udare yato
saccam karomi tiddtinam soraccam me pamocanam. ||3||
Viriyara me dhura-dhorayham yogakkhemadhivahanam
gacchati ativattanam yattha gantvii na socati. ||4||
Evam esa kasi katthii sa hoti amatapphala
etam kasim kasitvana sabbadukkba pamuccatiti.' " ||5||
Atha kho Kaslbharadviijo briihmano mahatiya kamsiipatiya
payasam vaddhetva Bhagavato upanamesi :
" Bhunjatu bhavam Gatamo payasam ! Kassako bhavam,
yamhi bhavam Gotamo amatapphalam kiisim kiisatiti." i| 6 1|
" * Gathabhigltam me abhojaneyyam
sampassatam brahmana n' esa dhammo
gathabhigltam panudanti buddhii
dhamme sati, brahmana, vutti-r-esa.' " ||6||
" * Aiinena ca kevalinam mahesim
khin&savam kukkuccavupasantara
annena piiuena upatthahassu
kbettam hi tain punnapekhassa hotiti/ " ||7||
" Atha kassa c&hara bho Gotama imam payitsam dammiti."
*' ' Na khvaham tam, brahmana, passiirai sadevake loke
samarake sabrahmake sassamanabriihraaniya pajiiya sadeva-
manussaya, yassa so payaso bhutto sammii pariniimam
gaccheyya, annatra Tathagatassa vii Tathiigatasiivakassa va :
tena hi tvam, brahmana, tam payasam appaharite va chaddeti
appjinake va udake opilapehiti. || 7 |j
Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo brahmano tam payasam appa-
SACCAVIBHANOA. 127
nake udake opililpesi. Atha kho so piiyaso udake pakkhitto
ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhiipayati sampadhiipayati : seyya-
thapi niima phiilo divasti santatto udake pakkhitto ciccitiiyati
ciccitayati sandliupiiyati sampadhiipayati : evam eva so
pjiyiiso udake pakkhitto ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhupiiyati
sampadhiipayati. ||8||
Atha kho Kaslbhiiradviijo briihmano samviggo lomahattha-
jiito yena Bhagavii ten' upasankami upasankamitva Bhaga-
vato piidesu sirasii nipatitvii Bhagavantam etad avoca :
" Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam, bho Gotama !
seyyathapi bho Gotama nikkujjitam vii ukkujjeyya, pati-
channam va vivareyya, miilhassa va maggam acikkheyya,
andhakare va telapajjotam dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani
dakkhintiti : Evam eva, bho Gotama, aneka pariyayena
dbammo pakiisito. Esaham bhagavantam Gotamam sara-
nam gacchiimi dhammaiica bhikkhu-sanghailca. Labheyyarn
ahara bhoto Gotamassa santike pabbajjam labheyyarn upa-
sampadan ti." || 9 1|
Alattha kho Kaslbharadviijo brahmano Bhagavato santike
pabbajjam, alattha upasarapadara. Acirupasampanno kho
pan' ayasmii Bhiiradviijo eko viipakattho appamatto atiipl
pahitatto viharanto na cirass' eva yass' atthiij'a kulaputta
sammad eva agarasma anagiiriyam pabbajanti, tad anutta-
ram brahmacariya-pariyosiinam ditth' eva dhamme sayam.
abhiiiiia sacchikatva upasarapajja vihiisi.
" Khlnii jati, vusitara brahmacariyam, katam karanlyam,
naparam itthattiij'ati," abhiunii anfiataro ca kho pan' ayasmii
Bharadviijo arahatara ahositi. ||10||
KASIBHARADVAJASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutain : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Biininasiyam
viharati Isipatane Migadiiye. Tatra kho Bhagavii bhikkhu
amantesi: 'bhikkhavo' ti, 'bhadante* ti. Te bhikkhu Bha-
gavato paccassosum. Bhagavii etad avoca : II 1 1|
128 SACCAVIBHANGA.
" Tathagatena, bhikkhave, arahatii sammitsainbuddhena
Buninasiyam Isipatane Migadilye anuttaram dhammacakkam
pavattitam appativattiyam saruanena vu bruhmanena vii
devena va Miirena va Brahrauna va kenaci va lokasmin ti.
Yad idam catunnain ariyasaccanam acikkhata desatil pafifia-
patji patthapata vivaranii vibhajanji uttaDakammam.
Katamesam catunnam ?
Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe —
Dukkhanirodhagaiuinlpatipada ariyasaccassa acikkhata
— pe— .11211
Tathagatena, bhikkhave, arahata sammasambuddhena
Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhamraacakkain
pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
devena va Marena va Brahrauna vii kenaci va lokasmim :
yad idam imesam catunnam ariyasaccanam acikkhata
— pe—. 11311
" Sevetha, bhikkhave, Sariputta-Moggalhme, bhejatha, bhi-
kkhave, Sariputta-Moggallane pandita bhikkhu anuggahaka
brahmacarinam : seyyathapi bhikkhave, janetti evam Sari-
putto: seyyathapi jatassa apiidetiievam Moggallano. Sari-
putto, bhikkhave, sotapatti-phale vineti ; Moggallano iitta-
matthe vineti ; Sariputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattiiri ariya-
saccjini vittharena acikkhitum desetum paiinapetum vivarituni
vibhajitura uttaniikiitun ti.
Idam avoca Bhagavii : idam vatva Sugato utthayasana
viharara pavisi. II 4 1|
Tatra kho iiyasma Sariputto acirapakkantassa Bhagavato
bhikkhu amantesi :
'Avuso bhikkhavo' ti 'avuso* ti kho. te bhikkhii ayasmato
Sariputtassa paccassosum : Ayasraa Sariputto etad avoca :
"Tathagatena, avuso, arahata sammasambuddhena Bara-
nasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam
pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va
devena va Marena va BrahmunJi vii kenaci vii lokasmim:
yad idam catunnam ariyasacciinaTn iicikkhatii — pe — . II 5 1|
SACCAVIBHANOA. 129
Xatamesam catunnam ?
Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ilcikkhata — pe —
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ticikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu — pe — .
Bukkhanirodhagaminlpatipadassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu
— pe— .11611
Kataraa ca, avuso, dukkhara ariyasaccam ?
" Jati pi dukkhii, jarii pi dukkha, vyiidhi pi dukkha, mara-
nam pi dukkhara, soka-parideva-dukkha-domanass-upayasa
dukkha : yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham, san-
khittena pane' upadiinakkhandha dukkha.
Katamii ca avuso jiiti ?
Ya tesam tesam sattiinam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jati
sanjati okkanti abhinibbatti khandhiinain piitubhavo ayatina-
nain patiliibho. — Ayam vuccat' avuso jati. ||1||
Katama ca avuso jara ?
Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jara,
jTranata, khandiccam, paliccam valittacata ayuno samhani
indriyanam paripako. — Ayam vuccat' avuso jara. ||2||
Katama ca avuso maranam ?
Ya tesam tesam sattiinam tamha tamha sattanikaye cuti
cavanata bhedo antaradhanam maccu maranam kalakiriya
khandhiinara bhedo kalebarassa nikkhepo. — Idam vuccat'
avuso maranam. ||3||
Katama ca avuso soko ?
Yo kho avuso afiiiatarannatarena byasanena samannaga-
tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa soko
socanti socanattam antosoko antoparisoko. — Ayam vuccat'
avuso soko. ||4||
Katama ca iivuso paridevo ?
Yo kho avuso annatarannatarena byasanena samannaga-
tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa adevo
paridevo iidevo paridevo iidevanJi paridevana adevitattam
paridevitattara. Ayam vuccat' iivuso paridevo. II 5 1|
Katama ca dukkham?
Yam kho iivuso kayikam dukkham kiiyikam kiiya-
samphassajam dukkham asiitam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat'
avuso dukkham. |j 6 1|
130 SACCAVIBHANGA.
Katamu ca ^l^also domanossam P
Yam kho avuso cetasikam dukkham cetasikam asiitam ma-
nosamphassajam dukkham asutam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat*
uvuso domanassam. II 7 II
£atamii ca iivuso upayiiso ?
Yo kho iivuso anfjatarannatarena byasanena saraannugatena
aniiatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa uyiiso upii-
yaso ayiisitattam upayasitattam. Ayam vuccat' avuso upa-
yaso. II8II '
Katama ca avuso yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi
dukkham ?
Jatidhammanam cTvuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati :
"aho vata mayam na jatidhammii assama, na ca vata no jati
agaccheyy&ti : na kho pan' etara icchjiya pattabbam." — Idam
pi yam p' iccham na labhati, tam pi dukkham.
Jaradhammtinara iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati :
*'aho vata mayam na jariidhamma assiima, na ca vata no jarii
iigaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam
pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
Byiidhidhammiinara avuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati :
" aho ca vata mayam na byiidhidhammii assiima, na ca vata no
byiidhi agaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam."
— Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
Maranadhammiinain iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati :
" aho ca vata mayam na maranadhamma assiima, na ca vata no
maranarn iigaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam."
— Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
Soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass-upiiyasii dhammiinam avuso
sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : " aho vata raayarn na soka-
paridevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisa dhammii assiima, na ca vata
no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisii iigaccheyum: na kho
pan* etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na
labhati tam pi dukkham. ||9||
Katamii c&vuso sankhittena pancupiidiinakkhandhii dukkhii?
Seyyathldara : Riipupiidiinakkhandho, vedanupiidiinakkha-
ndho, sanfiupiidiinakkhandho, saiikhiirupiidiinakkhandho, vi-
ilnanupiidiinakkhandhii. — Ime vuccat' iivuso sankhittena
pailcupadiiQakkhandhii dukkhii. || 10 1|
SACCAVIBHANGA. 131
Idam vuccat* iivuso dukkhara ariyasaccam. ||7I|
Xatama ca avuso dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ?
Yayara tanba ponobbhavikanandiraga-sahagata tatra tatri-
bbinaadinl : seyyathldam :
Kiimatanba bbavatanba vibbavatanba. — Idara vuccat' avuso
dukkbasamudayam ariyasaccam. || 8 1|
Katama ca avuso dukkbanirodbam ariyasaccam ?
Yo tassa yeva tanbaya asesaviraganirodbo ciigo patinissago
mutti analayo. — Idam vuccat' avuso dukkbanirodbam ariya-
saccam. [|9||
Katama ca avuso dukkbanirodbagaraini patipada ariya-
saccam ?
Ayam eva ariyo attbangiko maggo : seyyatbidam : samma-
dittbi, sammasankappo, sammavaca, sammakammanto, samma-
ajlvo, samma-vayamo, sammasati, sammasamadbi.
Katama ca avuso sammadittbi ?
Yam kbo avuso dukkbe-fianam, dukkbasamudaye-nanam,
dukkbanirodbe-nanam, dukkbanirodba-gaminlpatipadaya-na-
nam. — ^Ayam vuccat' avuso sammadittbi. || 1 1|
Katama ca avuso sammasankappo ?
Nekkbammasankappo abyilpadasahkappo avibimsasan-
kappo. — Ayam vuccat' avuso sammasankappo. II 2 II
Katama ca avuso sammavaca ?
Musavjidii veramani pisunavacaya veramani pbarusavacjiya
veramani sampbappalapaya veramani. — Ayam vuccat' avuso
sammavaca. ||3||
Katama ca avuso sammakammanto ?
Panatipjita veramani adinnadanii veramani kiimesu miccbil-
cara veramani. — Ayam vuccat' avuso sammakammanto. ||4||
Katama ca avuso samma-ajlvo.
Idb' avuso ariyasavako miccba ajlvam pabaya, samma-
ajlvena jivikam kappeti. — Ayam vuccat' avuso samma
ajivo. II 5 II
Katama ca avuso samraavayiimo ?
Idb' avuso bbikkbu anuppanniinam papakiinam akusalanam
182 SACCAVIBHANGA.
dhammiinam anuppildiiya chandam janeti vayamati viriyam
urabhati cittam pagganhuti padahati.
Uppanniinam papakilnam akusaliinam dhammunam pahii-
nuya chandam janeti — pe — padahati.
Anuppannanara kusahTnam dhammunam uppiidiiya chandam
janeti — pe — padahati.
Uppannanam kusaliinam dhammanam thitiya asammohiiya
bhiyo bhiivuya vepulliiya bhavaniiya paripfiriya chandam
janeti vayamati viriyam arabhati cittam padahati. — Ayam
vuccat* iivuso sammavayiimo. ||6||
Katama ca avuso sammasati ?
Idh' avuso bhikkhu kiiye kilyanupassi viharati atiipl sampa-
jano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.
Yedana vedananupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjha-
domanassam.
Citte citt&nupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjhado-
manassam.
Dhamme dhammanupassi viharati atapl sampajano satima
vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.
Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammasati. II 7 1|
Katama ca avuso sammiisamadhi ?
Idh' iivuso bhikkhu vivicc' eva kiimehi vivicca akusalehi,
dhammehi savitakkam saviciiram vivekajam pitisukham
pathamajjhjinam upasampajja viharati.
Vitakkaviciiranam vupasamii ajjhattam sampasiidanam
cetaso ekodibhiivam avitakkam avicJiram samadhijam piti-
sukham dutiyajjhanam upasampajja viharati.
Pitiya ca viriigii upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajano
sukhanca kiiyena patisamvedeti yan tam ariyii acikkhanti
upekkhako satima sukhavihiirl ti tatiyajjhiinara upasampajja
viharati.
Sukhassa ca pahiinil dukkhassa ca pahiinji pubbc ca soma-
nassa-domanassanara atthagamjl addukkham asukham upe-
kkhiisati-parisuddhim catutthajjhanam upasampajja viharati.
— ^Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammiisamiidhi. II 8 |j
Idam vuccat' avuso dukkhanirodhagiiminlpatipada ariya-
saccam. II 10 11
ARUNAVATISUTTA. 133
Tathiigatena iivuso arahatii sammusarabuddhena Biirunasi-
yara Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammaoakkam pavatti-
tam appativattiyara samanena vii brahmanena va devena va
Marena vii Brahmunii vu kenaci vii lokasmim acikkhata
desata pafinapata patthapata vivarana vibhajana uttana-
kamman ti. II 11 II
Idam avoca ayasma Sariputto attamanii te bhikkhu ayas-
mato Sariputtassa bhasitam abhinandun ti.
SACCAVIBHANGA.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savattbiyam
viharati Jetavane Anatbapindikassa arame. Tatra kbo
Bhagava bbikkbu amantesi * bhikkbavo ' ti * bbadante * ti.
Te bbikkbu Bhagavato paccassosum : Bbagava etad avoca: II 1 1|
" Bbfltapubbam, bbikkbave, raja abosi Arunavii. Rafino
kbo pana bbikkbave Arunavato Arunavati nama rajadbani
abosi. II 2 II
Ariinavatiyam kbo pana bbikkbave rujadbanlyam Sikbl
Bbagava Arabam Sammasambuddbo upanissaya vibasi. II 3 II
Sikhissa kbo pana bbikkbave Bbagavato Arabato Samma-
sambuddbassa Abhibbu Sambbavam nama savakayugam
abosi aggam bbaddayugam. ||4||
Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bbagava Arabam Samma-
sambuddbo Abbibbum bbikkbum amantesi : || 5 1|
" Ayama brabmana yena anfiataro brabmaloko : ten' upa-
safikamissama yiiva bbattassa kiilo bbavissati." || 6 1|
Evam bbante ti kbo te bbikkbave Abbibbu bhikkhu
Sikhissa Bhagavato Arabato Sammasambuddhassa pacca-
ssosi. 11711
Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bhagavii Arabam Samma-
sambuddbo Abhibbu ca bhikkhu scyyathapi nama : balavu
134 ARUNAVATISUTTA.
puriso samraifljitam vu baham pasiireyya pasaritam va
baham sammifijeyya. || 8 II
Evam evara Arunavatiya rajadhaniya antarahita tasmim
brahmaloke paturahesum.
Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhl Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum iimantesi : " Patibhatu
brabmana tam brabmuno ca brahma-parisa ca brabmapari-
sajjanam ca dhamml kathji ti." ||9||
Evam bhante ti kbo bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa
Bhagavato Arahato Sammiisambuddhassa patissutvii brahma-
nauca brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca dhammiya kathaya
sandassesi samiidapesi samuttejesi sampahamsesi. IllOli
Tatra sudara bhikkhave brahma ca brahmaparisa ca
brahmaparisajjii ca ujjhayanti khiyanti vipacenti.
Acchariyam vata bho abbhutara vata bho kathauhi nama
satthari sammukhlbhute savako dhammam desessatiti. ||11||
Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl BhagavJi Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi : —
" Ujjhayanti kho te brahmana brahma ca brahmaparisa ca
brahmaparisajjii ca : acchariyam vata bho abbhutam vata
bho — kathauhi nama satthari sammukhlbhute savako
dhammam desessatiti."
Tena hi tvam brahmana bhiyyo so mattaya brahmaiica
brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca saravejehiti. || 12 II
Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu
Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva
dissamiinena pi kayena dhammam desesi adissamiinena pi
kayena dhammam desesi : dissamiinena hetthimena upaddha-
kayena, adissamiinena uparimena upaddhakiiyena dhammam
desesi : dissamiinena pi uparimena upaddhakiiyena, adissa-
miinena hetthimena upaddhakiiyena pi dhammam desesi. ||13||
Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahmii ca brahmaparisii ca brahma-
piirisajjii ca acchariyabbhuta-citta-jiitii ahesum. Acchariyam
vata bho abbhutam vata bho samanassa mahiddhikata mah&-
nubhiivatati. ||14||
Atha kho Abhibhil bhikkhQ Sikhira Bhagavantara Ara-
hantam Sammasambuddham etad avoca :
ARUNAVATISUTTA. 135
" Abhijanami khv&ham bhante bhikkhusaughassa maj jhe
evariipam viicam bhasita, pahomi khvahara avuso brahraaloke
thito sahassllokadhatura sarena vinnapetun ti. Etassa brahraa-
na kalo yam tvam brahmana brahmaloke thito sahassi-loka-
dhatum sarenavinuapeyyasiti. ||15||
Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu Sikhissa
Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva brahma-
loke thito ima giithayo abhasi :
Arabhatha, nikkamatha, yufijatha Buddhasiisane
Dhunatha maccuno senaiu nalikeram va kufijaro. || 1 1|
Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati
Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam karissatlti. ||2||
Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl ca Bhagava Araham Samma-
sambuddho Abhibhii ca bhikkhu brahmanca brahmaparisaiica
brahmaparisajje ca samvejetva seyyathapi nama : balava pu-
riso samminjitaip. va baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham
sammifijeyya : evam eva tasmim brahmaloke antarahita Arii-
navatiya rajadhaniya paturahesum. ||16||
Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhi Bhagava Araham Sammasam-
buddho bhikkhu amantesi : —
"Assuttha no tumhe bhikkhave Abhibhussa bhikkhuno
brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti." ||17||
"'Assumha kho mayam bhante Abhibhussa bhikkhuno
brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.'" I|18||
" Yatha katham pana tumhe bhikkhave assuttha Abhi-
bhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanass4
ti." II 19 II
"*Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi-
kkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa :
" Arabhattha, nikkamatha, yunjatha Buddhasasane
Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram va kufijaro. II 1 1|
" Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati
Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam korissati tL l|2||
136 DEVADAHASUTTA.
" * Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi-
kkhuno bmhmaloko thitassa gathilyo bhasamanassil ti.'" ||20||
"Siidhu, sildhu, bbikkhave, sadbu kho turahe bhikkhave
assuttha Abbibhussa bbikkbuno brahmaloke thitassa giithayo
bhasamanassa ti. I|21||
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato
bbasitam abhinandun ti. ||22||
ARUNAVATISUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu viha-
rati Devadahan niima Sakyanam nigamo. Tatra kho Bhagava
bhikkhu amantesi : —
"Naham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhiinam chasa
phass&yatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi."
"Na ca panaham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhunam
chasu phassayatanesu nappamjidena karanlyan ti vadiimi."
"Ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahanto khlniisava vusitavanto
katakaraniya ohitabharii anupattasadatthti parikkhlna bhava-
samyojana sammad-aililavimutta : soham bhikkhiinam chasu
phassilyatanesu nappamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi. || 1 1|
"Tarn kissa hetu? Katan tesu appamiidena abhabbate
pamajjitum. Ye ca kho te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekha
appattamiinasii anuttarara yogakkheraam patthayamiinii vi-
haranti ; nes&hara bhikkhave bhikkhiinam chasu phassiiya-
tanesu appamiidena karanlyan ti vadiimi." ||2||
" Tam kIssa hetu ? Santi bhikkhave cakkhuvinneyyil,
riipii manoramii pi amanoramii pi. Tyassa phussa cittani na
pariyiidiiya titthati cetaso apariyiidiinii araddham hoti viri-
yam asalllnam upatthitii sati apamuttha passaddho kiiyo asa-
raddho samilhitam cittam ekaggam : imain khv^ham, bhi-
DEVADAHASUTTA. 137
kkhave, appamadassa phalam samphassa-miino tesam bhi-
kkhilnam chasu phassayatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti
vadami. || 3 ||
Santi bhikkhave ghanavinfieyya gandha manorama pi
amanorama pi. || 4 ||
Santi bhikkhave jivhavinneyya rasa manorama pi amano-
rama pi. il 5 II
Santi bhikkhave kayavinneyyii photthabba manorama pi
amanorama pi. || 6 ||
Santi bhikhhave manovififieyya dhamma manorama ama-
norama pi.
Tyassa phussa cittam na pariyadaya titthati cetaso
apariyadtina araddham hoti : viriyam asalllnam upatthita sati
apamuttha passaddho kayo asaraddho samahitam cittam
ekaggam : imam khvaham bhikkhave appamadaphalam
samphassamano tesam bhikkhunam chasu phassayatanesu
appamadena karanlyan ti vadami. || 7 1|
Liibha vo bhikkhave suladdhaip vo bhikkhave khano vo
patiladdho brahmacariya vasayati.
Dittha mayii bhikkhave cha phassayataniinika nama niraya.
Tatha : yam kinci cakkhunii rupam passati anittharu-
pan iieva passati neva itthariipam akantarupau iieva passati
no kantarupam amanapariipan neva passati no manaparilpam.
Yam kiuci sotena saddam sunati — pe — .
Yam kiuci gbiinena gandham ghayati — pe — .
Yam kinci jivhaya rasam sayati — pe — .
Yam kiiici kayena photthabbam phusati — pe — .
Yam kiuci manasil dhammara vijanati anittharQpam yeva
vijanati, no ittharupam akantarupam yeva vijanati, no kanta-
rupam amanapariipam yeva vijanati no maniiparupara. ||8||
Labha vo, bhikkhave, suladdham vo, bhikkhave, khapo vo,
bhikkhave, patiladdho brahmacariyavasaya.
Dittha maya, bhikkhave, cha-phassiiyatanika nilma saggit.
Tuttha : yam kinci cakkhuna rupam passati ittharupam
138 DEVADAHA8UTTA.
yeva passati no anittharnpam : kantariipam yeva passati no
akantam rilpam : manaparilpam yeva passati no amanapa-
rupam.
— pe— .
Yam kifici manasu dhammam vijiinati ittharupam yeva
vijanati, no anittharupam : kantarupam yeva vijanati, no
akantarupam : manaparupam yeva vijanati, no amanapa-
rOpam. ||9||
Liibha vo bhikkhave, suladdham vo bhikkhave, khano vo
patiladdho brahraacariya vasay&ti.
Ruparamii, bhikkhave, devamanussa riiparatii, rupasamu-
dita rupaviparinama-viraganirodha dukkhii bhikkhave
devamanussa viharanti.
Saddarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Gandharama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Rasarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Photthabbiirama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Dhamraaramii, bhikkhave, devamanussa dhammarata
dhammasamudita dhammaviparinama viraganirodha du-
kkha, bhikkhave, devamanussa viharanti. I|10||
Tathagato ca kho, bhikkhave, Arahara Sammasambuddho
rupanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadafica adinavaoca
nissarananca yathabhutam viditva na ruparamo, na ruparato
na rupasamudito na rilpaviparijgiama yiriiganirodha sukho
bhikkhave Tathagato viharati.
Saddanam — pe — .
Gandhanam — pe — .
Kasanam — pe — .
Photthabbanam — pe — .
Dhammanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadauca adlna-
vauca nissaranailca yathabhutam viditva : na dhammaramo,
na dhammarato, na dhammasamudito, na dhammaviparinama
viraganirodho sukho bhikkhave Tathagato viharatiti. ||11||
Idam avoca Bhagavii. Idam vatva ca Sugato : athaparam
etad avoca sattha : —
DEVADAHASUTTA. 139
Bupu saddu gandha rasa phassa dhamma ca kevala
Ittha kanta manapa ca yava tattha ti vuccanti. il 1 1|
Sadevakassa lokassa ete vo sukhasammata
Yattha ce te nirujjhanti tarn tesam dukkham samma-
tam. II2II
Sukham tain ditthamariyehi sakkiiyassa nirodhanam
Paccanlkam idam hoti sabbalokena passatam. || 3 1|
Yam pare sukhato ahu tad ariya ahu dukkhato
Yam pare dukkhato ahu tad ariya sukhato vidu. ||4I|
Passadhammam duvijanam sammulhettha aviddasu
Nivutanam tamo hoti andhakaro apassatam. || 5 1|
Satanca vivatam hoti aloko passatam iva
Santike na vijananti maggadhammassa kovida. ||6||
Bhavaraga-paretebhi bhavayoganusaribhi
Maradheyyanupannebhi nayamdhammosusambuddho. ||7||
Ko nu aunatram ariyebhi padi sambuddham arahati
Yam padam sammadaunaya parinibbanti auasava ti. i| 8 1|
DEVADAHASUTTAM.
PARITTAM NITTHITAM.
A COLLECTION OF KAMMAVACAS.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA-
SAMBUDDHASSA.
Chap. I.
THE ORDINATION OF A PRIEST.
Pathamam upajjham gahapetabbo, upajjham gahapetva
pattacivaram acikkhitabbam :
* Ayan te patto ? ' " Ama bhante."
' Ayam sanghati ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Ayam uttarasaiigo ? ' " Ama bhante."
' Ayam antaravasako ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Gaccha amumhi, okase titthahi ! '
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ndgo dyasmato Tissassa upa-
sampadapekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, aham Ndgam
auusaseyyam.
Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te paccakalo bhutakalo. Yam jatam,
tarn sanghamajjhe pucchante : santam atthiti vattabbam,
asantam natthiti vattabbam.
Ma kho vitthiisi ! ma kho manku ahosi !
Evam tam pucchissan ti.
Santi te evarupa abadhii ?
* Kuttham ? ' " Natthi bhante."
* Gando r " Natthi bhante."
* Kilaso ? ' " Natthi bhante."
*So8o?' " Natthi bhante."
* Apamiiro ? ' " Natthi bhante."
142 UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
* Manusso' si P' " Ama bbante."
' Puriso' si P ' " Ama bhante."
* Bhujisso* si P * " Ama bhante."
' Anano' si P * " Ama bhante."
' Na' si rajabhato P * " Ama bhante."
* Anuuiiato' si matapituhi ?* " Ama bhante."
* Paripunna-visati- vasso 'si P * " Ama bhante."
* Paripunnan te patta-clvaram P' " Ama bhante."
* Kinnamo 'si P' " Aham bhante Nago nama."
*Ko namo te upajjhayo P' "Upajjhayo me bhante aijasmd
Tiasathero nama."
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ndgo di/asmato Tissassa
upasampadjipekho. Anusittho so maya.
Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, Ndgo agaccheyya.
Agacchahiti vattabbo :
Sangham bhante upasampadam yiicami : UUumpatu mam
bhante sangho, anukampam upadiiya !
Dutiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami : Ullum-
patu mam bhante sangho, anukampain upadaya !
Tatiyara pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami : Ullum-
patu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upadaya !
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Ndgo dyasmato Tissassa
upasampadjipekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam aham Ndgam
antariiyike dhamme puccheyyam :
Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te saccakalo bhiitakiilo. Yam jatam
tarn pucchami : Santam atthiti vattabbam, asantam uatthiti
vattabbam.
Santi te evarOpa abadha :
' Kutthain P ' " Natthi bhante."
* Gando P' " Natthi bhante."
' Kilaso P ' " Natthi bhante."
'SosoP' " Natthi bhante."
* Apamaro P ' " Natthi bhante."
* Manusso' si P ' " Ama bhante."
* Puriso' si P ' " Ama bhante."
* Bhujisso' si P * " Ama bhante.*
* Anano' si P * " Ama bhante."
UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA. 143
* Na* si rajabhato ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Anuilimto' si miitapituhi ? * " Ama bhante."
* Paripunna-vlsati-vasso' si ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Paripunnan te pattacivarara ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Kinnumo' si ? ' " Aham bhante Ndgo nama."
' Ko namo te upajjhayo ? ' " Upaj jhayo me bhante dyasmd
Tismtthero nama."
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Ndgo ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho, parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi, pari-
punn' assa patta-clvaram Ndgo sangham upasampadam yacati
dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena.
Yadi sanghassa pattakallani sangho Ndgam upasampadeyya
dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena.
Esd Natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Nago ayasmato
Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dham-
mehi paripunn' assa pattaclvaram Niigo sangham upasampa-
dam yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Niigam.
upasampadeti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato
khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena,
80 tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
Dutiyam pi etam attham vadami :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi pari-
punn' assa pattacivarara Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagani upasampa-
deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati
Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh'
assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
Tatiyam pi etam attham vadami.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Niigo ayasmato Tissassa
upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi pari-
pun^* assa pattaclvaram Nago sangham upasampadam yacati
ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagara upasampa-
deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati
Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh'
assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
144 UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
Upasarapanno sarighena Niigo ayasmatii Tissena upajjhii-
yena : khamati saughassa : tasmu tunhi evam etain dhura-
yainiti. —
Tiivadeva chiiyji metabbii ;
Utupamiinam iicikkhitabbam ;
Divasabhjlgo iicikkhitabbo ;
Sahgiti ucikkbitabba. —
Cattiiro nissayii ucikkbitabba
Cattari ca akaranlyani acikkhitabbani :
1) " Phidiydlopahhojanam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yava-
jlvam ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalilbho : Sangbabhattam,
uddesabbattam, nimantanam, salakabbattam, pakkbikam,
uposatbikara, patipadikam." " " Ama bbante ! " "
2) " Pamsiikulaclvaram nissdya 2)abbaJ/d : tattha te yava-
jlvam ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalilbho : khomam, kappiisi-
kam, koseyyam, kambalara, sanara, bhaiigam." " " Ama
bhante.""
3) *' Rukkhamulasendsanam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te
yavajivain ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalabho : viharo addha-
yogo, pasiido, hammiyam, guba." " " Ama bbante ! " "
4) " Putimuttabhesajjam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yava-
jlvam ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalabho : Sappi, navanitam,
telam, madbu, phanitam." " " Ama bhante ! " "
1) " Upasampannena hhikkhund methimo dhanimo na patisevi-
iabho antamaso tiracchdnagatdya pi. Yo bhikkhu methunam
dhammam patisevati assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyya-
thiipi niima : Puriso sisacchinno abhabbo tena sarirabandba-
nena jivitura, evam eva bhikkhu methunam dhammam pati-
sevitva assamano boti asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajivam
akaranlyani." " " Ama bhante ! " "
2) " Upasampannena hhikkhund adinnam theyyasahkhdtam
na addtahham antamaso tinasaldkam updddya, Yo bhikkhu
pjidam vii padarabam vii atirekapjidam va adinnam theyya-
sahkhatam adiyati, assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathlipi
nama : Pandupaliiso bandhana pamutto abhabbo haritattSya
evam eva bhikkhu padam va padarabam va atirekapadam va
TICIVARENA AVIPPAVASA. 145
adinnam theyyasankhutam adiyitva, assamano hoti asakya-
puttiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." ** " Ama
bhante!""
3) " Upasampannena hhikkhuna sanclcca pdnojlvitcL na voro-
petabbo antamaso kHnthakipillikam updddya : Yo bhikkhu
sailcicca raanussaviggaham jlvitii voropeti antamaso gabbha-
patanam upadiiya assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo, Seyyathapi
nama puthu sila dvedha bhinna appatisandhika hoti, evam eva
bhikkhu sancicca manussaviggaham jivita voropetva assamano
hoti, asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." " "Ama
bhante.""
4) " Upasampannena bhikkhund uttari-manussa-dhammo na
uUapitabbo antamaso simndgdre abhirdmiti. Yo bhikkhu pa-
piccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dham-
mam uUapati jhanara va vimokkharn va samadhim va sama-
pattim vji maggam va phalara va assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo.
Seyyathapi nama : talo matthaka chinno, abhabbo puna vi-
rulhaya evam eva bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam
abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam ullapitva, assamano hoti
asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." " " Ama
bhante.""
Chap. II.
THE INVESTITURE OF A PRIEST WITH THE
THREE ROBES.
Sunatu me bhante sangho. Yo so sanghena ticivarena
avippavaso sammato. Yadi sahghassa pattakallara sangho
tarn ticivarena avippavasam samuhaneyya.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho : Yo so sanghena ticivarena
avippavaso sammato, sangho tam ticivarena avippavasam
samuhanati. Yass4yasmato khamati etassa ticivarena avippa-
10
146 XJPOSATHA KAMMAVACA.
vasassa samugghato, so tunh* assa. Yassa na kkhamati so
bhasej'ya. Samiihato so sanghena ticlvarena avippaviiso.
Kliamati sahghassa tasmii tui'ibl evam etam dbarayamiti.
Chap. III.
THE FIXING OF A BOUNDAUY FOR THE PER-
FORMANCE OF THE UPOSATHA.
SunJitu me bhante sangbo ! Yii sa sangbena sima samma-
nnitii samiinasamvasa ek' uposatba : yadi sangbassa patta-
kallam sangbo tam simam samuhaneyya.
Esd mtti:
Suniltu rae bbante sangbo ! yii sa sangbena sTma sarama-
nnita samanasamvasii ek' uposathii, sangbo tam sImam samii-
banati. Yassayasmato kbamati etissii simaya samanasamva-
sjiya ek' uposatbaya samuggbato so tunb' assa. Yassa na
kkbamati, so bbiiseyya. Samubatii sa slmii sangbena samana-
saraviisa ek' uposathii. Kbamati sangbassa tasmii tunbl evam
etam dhiirayiimiti.
* Purattbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' " Piisiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
* Purattbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam ? ' " Pasiino
bbante!"
' Eso piisiino nimittam ! *
* Dakkhiniij^a disiiya kin nimittara ? * " Piisiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
* Dukkbiniiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?' "Piisiino bbante!"
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! *
* Paccbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' " Pasiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
* Paccbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam ?' "Piisiino bbante !"
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
' Uttariiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' *' Piisiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
KATHINA KAMMAVACA. 147
'TJttariiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?* " Pasano bhante !'*
* Eso pasano nimittam ! '
SunJitu me bhante sangho ! YuvatJi samanta nimitta
kittitii : yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho etehi nimittehi
simam sammanneyya samuna-samvasam ek' uposatham.
JEsd mtti :
Suniitu me bhante sangho ! Yavata samanta nimitta kittita
sangho etehi nimittehi sImam sammannati samanasamvasam
ek' uposatham. Yassayasmato khamati etehi nimittehi sl-
raaya sammuti samana-samvasaya ek' uposathjiya, so tunh'
assa ! Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya ! Sammata sa sima
sanghena etehi nimittehi samanasamviisa ek' uposatha. Kha-
mati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena sammata sa-
manasamvasa ek' uposatha : Yadi sanghassa pattakallam
sangho tam sImam ticivarena avippavasam sammaneyya tha-
petva gamanca gamupacaranca.
End fiatti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena sIma sammata
samanasamvasa ek' uposatha sangho tam sImam ticivarena
avippavasam sammannati thapetva gamanca gamupacaraiica.
Yassayasmato khamati etissa simaya ticivarena avippava-
saya sammuti thapetva gamanca gamupacarafica, so tunh*
assa ! yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
Sammata sa sIma sanghena ticivarena avippavasii thapetva
gamanca gamupacaranca. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi
evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. IV.
THE BESTOWMENT OF THE KAJHINA ROBE.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Idam sanghassa kathina-
dussam uppannain. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, sangho
imam kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno dadoyya
kathinam attharitum.
148 KATHINA KAMMAVACA.
JEsd mtiL
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Idam sanghassa kathina-
dussam uppannam. Sangho imam kuthinadussam itthanna-
massa bhikkhuno deli kuthinam attharitum. Yass&yasmato
khamati iraassa kathinadussassa itthannamassa bhikkhuno
dilnam kathinam attharitum so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkha-
mati 80 bhaseyj'a. Dinnam idam sahghena kathinadussam
itthannamassa bhikkhuno kathinam attharitum. Khamati
sanghassa, tasma tunhi, evam etam dharayamlti.
Kathinadayakassa vattham atthi sace so tarn ajananto
pucchati : " Bhante katham kathinam djitabban ti ? "
Tassa evam acikkhitabbam : " " Tinnam civaranam ailfia-
tara-pahonakam suriyuggamana-samaye vattham kathinacl-
varam demii ti diitum vattatiti :
" " Attharakena bhikkhuna sace sanghatiya kathinam
attharitu kamo hoti, poranika sahghjiti paccuddharitabba :
nava sanghati adhitthatabba, "imiiya sanghatiya kathinain
attharamiti," vaca bhinditabbii. Tena kathinattharakena
bhikkhuna sahgham upasahkamitva ekamsam uttarasangam
karitva afijalim paggahetva evam assa vacanlyo :
" Atthatara, bhante, sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi-
nattharo, anumodatha ! "
" " Atthatam avuso sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi-
nattharo anumodama ti ! " "
SunJitu me bhante sangho ! Yadi sanghassa pattakallam
sangho kathinam uddhareyya.
Ead hatii :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yadi sanghassa pattakallam
sangho kathinam uddharati. Yassayasmato khamati kathi-
nassa ubbharo so tunh' assa ! yassa na kkhamati, so bha-
seyya. —
Ubbhatam sahghena kathinam ! Khamati sanghassa tasma
tunbi evam etam dharayamiti.
THERA-SAMMUTI-NAMASAMMUTTI. 149
Chap. V.
THE ELECTION OF A PRIEST.
Aham bhante itthannamam thera-sammutim iccharai !
soham, bhante, sangham itthannamam therasammutirn
yacarai ! Dutiyam pi yacapetva, tatiyam pi yacapetva
byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sarigho iiapetabbo :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam itthannatno bhikkha
sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati. Yadi san-
ghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthan-
namam therasammutirn dadeyya.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu
sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati, sangho itthan-
namassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutirn deti. YasslL-
yasmato khamati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam
therasammutiya danam, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati
so bhaseyya. — Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno
itthannamam therasammuti : khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi
evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. YI.
THE GIYING OF A NAME TO A PRIEST.
Aham bhante itthannamam namasammutim icehami, soham
bhante sangham itthannamam namasammutim yacamiti.
Dutiyam pi yacapetva tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhi-
kkhuna patibalena sangho napetabbo :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu
sangham itthannamam namasammutim j'acati. Yadi sanghassa
pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthanoamam
namasammutim dadeyya.
End natti :
150 VIHARA KAMMAVACA.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! A^-am itthannamo bbikkhu
sangbam itthannamam namasamrautim yacati : sahgbo
itthannamassa bhikkbuno ittbanniimam namasammutim deti.
Yassfiyaamato khamati ittbannamassa bliikkbuno ittbanna-
mam niima sammutiya danam so tunb' asaa ! Yassa na kkba-
mati so bhiiseyya.
Dinna sahgbena ittbannamassa bbikkbuno ittbanniimam
nilmasammuti : Kbamati sangbassa tasma tui^bi evam etam
dbiirayamiti. —
Evam kammavacam katva byattena bbikkbuna patibalena
databbo ti.
Chap. VII.
THE DEDICATION OF A YIHARA.
Sunatu me bbante sangbo ; Yadi sangbassa pattakallara
sahgbo ittbannamam vibaram kappiyabbumim sammanneyya.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bbante sangbo ! Sangbo ittbannamam viba-
ram kappiyabbumim sammannati. Yass&yasmato kbamati
ittbannamassa vibarassa kappiya bbumiyii sammuti so tunb*
assa : Yassa na kkbamati so bbaseyya. Sammato sahgbena
itthannamo vibiiro kappiyabbumi. Kbamati sangbassa tasma
tunbi evam etam dbiirayamiti.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
III. GLOSSARY.
GLOSSARY.
A, aud before vowels AN, a negative
particle ; used only in composi-
tion.
AMSO, a part, a period of time.
AMSO, AMSAM, shoulder.
a-kattho (adj.), not ploughed.
a-kano, rice freed from the red coat-
ing which underlies the husks.
a-kanto (adj.), unpleasant, disagree-
able.
tt-kaliko (adj.), without delay (epi-
thet of the dhamma), immediate.
a-kuppo (adj.), firm, immoveable.
a-kusalo (adj.), had, evil, sinful.
a-kkuddho (adj.), not violent.
akkha-dhutto, gambler.
akkhata (m.), one who tells.
a-kkhati, to tell.
AKKHO, a die.
AGGAM, point, top, extremity.
AGGI (m.), fire.
AGGO (adj.), first, foremost.
ANGAM, limb ; share, quality, at-
tribute.
acceti, to pass beyond, to over-
come ; p. p. p. atito, past.
AJJA (adv.), now, to-day.
ajjatagge, henceforward .
AJJHAITAM, individual thought.
ajjhattarh (adv.), relating to the in-
dividual.
ajjhattiko (adj.), internal, belonging
to the individual.
AJJHAYAKO, a preceptor.
ANJALI (m.), the hollow of the
joined hands.
annataro, one, a certain.
ANNA (f.) knowledge.
anhatra (adv.), otherwise, with the
exception of.
ANNO, other.
ATTO, a case, a cause.
ATTHA (num.), eight.
atthahgiko (adj.), eightfold.
atthamo, eighth.
ATTHI (n.), bone; caus. atthiyati,
to treat as a bone.
ATTHI'^"NJA (f.), marrow.
ATTHO, reason.
APPHAYOGO (t. t.), large hall.
anuko (adj.), very small.
ANNAVO, the sea, the ocean.
ATI (adv. and prep.), over, beyond,
exceeding, before vowels ace.
ati-go (adj.), escaping from. [gant.
ati-mannati, to despise, to be arro-
ati-mant (adj.), proud.
ATIREKALABHO (t. t.), extra
allowance.
151
GLOSSARY.
ATTA (n.), self, mind (for declen-
sion, see Grammar).
A'lTHA (adv.), here. [arice.
ATTIIAM (Skr. tuta), disappear-
att/ia-gamo, atthan°, disappearance,
annihilation.
a-ttharati, to spread out.
atthdya (adv.), for the good of.
AT'l'HI, to he (for conjugation, see
Grammar).
ATTHO, reason, desire ; property.
ATHA, ATHO (adv.), and ; hut.
a-thuso (adj.), free from husk.
a-dlnnaddnaih, taking what is not
given.
ADDHANAM, a road ; a long time.
ADHAMO (adj.), lowest.
AD HI (adv. and prep.), above, over;
frequently in composition before
vowels ajjh.
adhi-titthati, to devote oneself.
adhi-tthanam, resting-place.
ADHI-PATI (m.), lord, chief.
adhi-bhdsati, to address ; aor. ajjha-
blidsi.
adhi-vahanath, carrying.
adhi-vdsanam, the assent, [accept.
adhi-vdseti (cans.), to consent, to
a-nano, free from debt.
an-attd (m.), not a self.
an-atto (adj.), without individu-
ality, unreal.
an-attha-samhito, profitless.
an-anu-giddho, without greediness.
un-anu-s8uto (adj.), unheard of.
an-anto, without end, innumerable.
ANA-BHAVO, non-existence; ana-
bhdvarh gacchatl, to come to
nothing, to perish.
an-abhirati, dissatisfaction.
an-arahd, not being a saint.
an-ariyo, ignoble.
anavajjata (f.), blamelessness.
anavajjo (adj.), blameless.
an-avayho (adj.), not to be given in
marriage.
an-avaseso, without remainder.
an-avilo, clear from.
andkulo, untroubled.
andgato, future, coming. [less.
andlayo, free from desire, passion-
A-NICCO (adj.) (t. t.), perishable,
not lasting.
anittho (adj.), unpleasant.
ANU (adv. and prep.), after, later ;
along, again, in consequence.
anu-kat/^ati, to recite.
anu-kampako, compassionate.
anu-kampl, compassionate.
anu-jdndti, to permit ; p. p. p. anuh-
nato.
ati'Utthdnam, want of energy.
anu-tthitati, to make to follow.
an-uttaro (adj.), than which none is
higher, the highest.
anudisd, (f.), an intermediate point
of the compass.
an-up-pagacchati, not to embrace.
anu-para-yati, to walk round and
round.
anu-passi (adj.), looking at, contem-
plating.
anu-pubbaso (adv.), in regular order.
anuppanno, not arisen.
an-uppddo, not arising.
anu-ydti, to follow.
anu-yogo, being addicted to.
anu-rakkhati, to protect.
GL088ART.
156
ANU-8AY0 (t. t.), repentance.
anusari (adj.), fullowing;.
anu-gdsati, to teach.
anu-ssarati, to call in mind.
anu-asaveti (cans.), to cause to be
heard, to proclaim.
an-ejo (adj.), free from desire.
an-ottapi (adj.), fearless of sinning.
ANTAM, the intestines, bowels.
ANTAGUNAM, mesentery.
antamaso, even.
ANTARA (adv. and prep.), within,
between, among.
antara-dhanam, disappearance.
antara-dhayati, to vanish, to hide ;
p. p. p. antarahito, vanished.
antardyiko, causing an obstacle.
ANTARA- VASAKO (t. t.), under-
garment worn by a Buddhist
priest.
ANTALIKKHAM, sky, air.
ANTIMO, last, final.
ANTO (adv. and prep.), within, in,
inside ; see also antara,
ANTO (also neuter), end, limit.
ANDHO (adj.), blind.
andha-koro, darkness.
ANNAM, food.
APAMARO, epilepsy.
a-pamuttho (adj.), not left behind.
a-pardjito, unconquered.
a-parimdno (adj.), immense, unde-
fined.
a-pariydddnarh, not taking up, not
laying hold of.
APARO (adj.), other, subsequent;
western.
a-pddako, having no feet.
APAYO [going away], hell.
APf, PI (part.), also, even.
a-pUuno (adj.), not calumnious.
ap-eti, to go away.
appa-kicco, having few cares.
a-pjHigabbho, not arrogant.
a-ppati-sandiko, that cannot be
united.
appa-nigghoso, free from noise.
a-ppa-matto, vigilant, careful.
O'ppamdno (adj.), infinite.
a-ppo'Ttiddo, vigilance, zeal.
appa-saddo, free from noise.
a-ppu-tanno, dissatisfied.
a-ppiyo, not dear, hateful.
APPO (adj.), small, weak ; fre-
quently in composition.
abbh-ug-gacchati, to reach. [sire.
A-BY-APADO (t.t.), absence of de-
a-bhabbatd (f.), non-liability.
a-bhabbo (adj.), incapable.
a-bhayam, safety from danger.
ABHI (adv. and prep.), exceeding;
in, into.
abhi-kkanto, handsome, beautiful.
abhl-kkanto (p. p. p.), abhikkamati,
advanced.
abhi-kkamati, to step forward.
abhi-kkamo, advancing.
abhi-gtto, (p. p. p.), recited.
nbhijdndti, to know ; g^r. abhinnd.
ABHIJJHA (f.), covetousness.
abhi-t'ttthati, to surpass.
ABHITTHANAM (t. t.), crime,
d«'adly sin.
ABHINHAM (adv.), repeatedly.
abhinhato (adv.), repeatedly, [with.
ab/ii-nandati, to rejoice, to l>e pleased
ABHINIBBATTI (f.) (t.t.), re-
birth ia another existence.
IM
GLOSSARY.
abhi-niveno, adhering to.
abhi-paleti, to guard, to keep.
abhi-ppa-modayam, rejoicing.
abhi-ramati, to delight.
abhi-rudo, cooing, singing.
abhi-ruhati, to mount.
abhi-vastati, to cause to rain.
abhi-vadeti, caus. of abhivadati, to
salute.
ah/ii-sameti, to penetrate.
a-bhojaneyyo, not to be eaten.
a-mato (adj.), immortal.
a-inanapo (adj.), uupleasing, un-
pleasant.
a-manoramo (adj.), unpleasant.
a-mitto, enemy.
ARANNAM, forest.
ARAHA ARAHAM (m.), a vener-
able person.
ARAHO (adj.), worth.
ARIYO (adj.), honourable, vener-
able, noble.
ARIYA-SACCAM (t. t.), sublime
truth.
ALAM (adv.), sufficient.
ALASO (adj.), idle.
ALOKO, intuition.
alliyati, to be attached, to adhere.
alltko (adj.), being addicted, ad-
hering.
AVA and O (prep, and adv.), away,
off; down.
ava-jdndti, to despise.
ava-ruddho (adj.), obstructed.
a-viddasu, ignorant.
a-vippavato, not parting.
a-vi-rufho (adj.), not grown.
a-vivayho (adj.), not marriageable.
avihimaa (f.), mercy, humanity.
avecca, gerund, of ava + yj i, to
penetrate.
a-veram, fricudliuess.
a-»anto (adj.), not good, wicked.
a-»ammoho (adj.), without infatua-
tion.
a-sallino, not cowering, resolute.
ASlTI (num.), eighty.
ASU (pron.), tliis, that (see Gram-
mar) ; amumhi (loc.), here.
a-suci (adj.), unclean.
a-$ubho (adj.), bad.
ASURO, an asura.
a-aeso (adj.), without rest ; all, every.
a-so/co, free from sorrow.
ASNATI, to eat. [ness.
asiddo, tasting ; enjoyment, happi-
a-ssasati, to inhale air.
ASSO, horse.
AHAM (pron.), I (see Grammar).
AH I (m.), a snake.
AHO (interjection).
A (prep.), until, as far as.
a-kankhati, to desire.
a-kapjM, ornament, disguise.
d-gacchatiy to come.
a-cikkhati, to tell, to announce, to
investigate.
ajahno (adj.), of noble birth, [hood.
d-jtvo, livelihood, means of liveli-
ATAPO, sunshine.
ATAPI (adj.), ardent, zealous.
a-ddti, to take ; pass, ddiyati.
ADICCO, the sun.
AdINAVO, distress, suffering ;
evil result.
dnantariko (adj.), uninterrupted.
0L08SART.
W7
AxAPAXAIVr (t. t.), inlniled and
exhaled lireath.
ANISAMSO, advjintage, profit.
aiiub/iavava(At\j.), possessing power.
anu-bhavo, power, dignity.
a-net't, to I)ring home.
apadeta (m.), inflioter, causer.
abadhiko (adj.), affected with illness.
ABADHO, illness.
a-b/iujati, to bend, to turn.
AMA (interj.), yes, truly.
a-manteti, to address. [sphere.
A YATANAM (t. t.), organs of sense ;
a-t/atiko, future.
AYASMA, old, venerable.
AYASO, despair.
AYU (n.), life.
a-yuto (adj.), endowed with.
a-raddho (p. p. p. to aradhaii), ac-
complished.
a-rahhati, to begin, to attempt,
to exert oneself; ger. arabbha ;
p. p. p. araddho.
AR AMO, pleasure, pleasure-garden.
a-ruhati, to ascend.
a-varanam, covering.
avaso, abode.
avahati, to convey.
AVI (adv.), manifestly, in full view
(see Grammar).
a-Duati, to enter, to approach.
AVUSO (voc. to ai/asmd), friend!
asanam, a seat.
A-SAVO (t. t), literally influence;
human passion ; khtnasavo, one in
whom human passiou is extinct.
ASEVi (adj.), addicted to.
Aha, to 8|ieak (see (jrammar).
ahanati, to strike.
AhARO, food.
a-huti (f.), offering.
ahuneyyo (adj.), sacrificial, wor-
shipful, worthy of offerings.
INGHA (interj.), come ! pray !
ICCHATI. to wish.
ICCHA, wish, desire, lust.
INJATI, to move, to be shaken.
INAM, debt. [sant.
ITTHO (adj.), desired, good, plea-
ITI, TI (conj.), thus.
ITTHATTAM, present condition.
itthan-namo, having such and such
a name, thus named.
ITTH I (f.), woman (for declension,
see Grammar).
IDDHI (f.) (t. t.), supernatural
power.
iddhiko (adj.), possessed of iddhi
(supernatural power).
iddhimd, possessed of supernatural
power.
IDHA (adv.), here, hither. [gwte.
indakhllo, pillar in front of a city
INDO, king, chief.
INDRIYO (t. t.), faculty.
ISI, a priest ; maheai (idem).
iaaariyam, dominion.
ISSARO, master, chief.
ISSA, jealousy, envy,
I.
Is A, pole of a plough.
U.
uk-kujjeti, to set up again.
Hg-gacchati, to rise.
158
GLOSSARY.
ug-gafihati, to rise, to lift np, to
learn.
ug-gamanath, rise.
UGGO, violent.
UCCA (indecl.), as Jirst part qf
compounds high ; uccdsayanath,
high seat.
UC-CARO, excrement.
UJU (adj.), straight.
uj-jhayati, to be irritated, annoyed.
u-tthahati, to rise, to stand up, to
exert oneself; p. p. p. vutthito.
UNNA-NABHI (m.), spider.
UNHAM, heat.
UNHO (adj.), hot.
UIjARO (adj.), mighty, great.
UTU (m. f. n.), season. [most.
UTTAMO (superl.), highest, ut-
UTTARA-SANGO, tlie upper yel-
low garment of a Buddhist priest.
UTTARO (adj.), higiier; northern.
UTTANO, supine ; open, evident,
clear, easy ; adv. uttdni and
uttdnd, clearly.
ut-trasati, to tremble.
UD (prep., only used in composi-
tion), above, away ; outside, out.
UDAKAM, water.
UDARAM, belly.
udariyam, stomach.
UDANAM, solemn utterance.
uddneti (cans.), to breathe forth.
ud-eti, to come up.
UDDHAM, upwards.
ud-dharati, to draw out ; to lift up.
UPA (adv. and prep ), near to ;
below, less.
upa-cdro, approach ; gamupacdro,
the approach to a village.
upa-jwati, to subsist by.
upajj hdpeti, to command.
UPAJJHO, preceptor.
upa-tthanam, attendance.
upa-tthito (p. p.p.), ready, present.
upaddho, half, partial.
upa-dissati, to be seen, discovered.
UPADHI (t. t.), a substratum of
being.
upandmfiti (cans.), to offer.
UPA-NAHl (adj.), bearing hatred.
upa-ni-pajjati, to lie down.
upanissdya, near, close to.
upa-nisso, residing in.
upa-pajjati, to come to, to attain.
upamo, highest.
uparimo (adj.), uppermost.
upa-vadati, to blame.
upa-san-kamati, to go to, to ap-
proach.
upa-samo, quietude, calm.
UPASAMPADA (f.) (t. t.), the upa-
sampada ordination.
upasampaddpekho, wishing for ordi-
nation.
UPADANAftl (t. t.), clinging to
existence, attachment ; okhandhdf
element of being.
upd-diyati, to take hold ; anukam-
path updddya, taking pity.
updydso, despair.
UPAYO, means of success.
UPASAKO, fem. UPASIKA (t. t.),
a lay devotee.
UPEKHA (f.), indifference, equa-
nimity.
npekkhako, resigfned, patient.
up-eti, to go, to approach ; pd^u-
peto, living, possessed of breath.
OLOSSART.
159
UPOSATHIKAlCf (t. t.), food
offered on full-moon days.
UPOSATHO (t. t.), the Buddhist
Sabbnth-day.
vp-pajjati, to arise.
uppanno, p. p. p. to uppajati.
UBBHARO=UDDHARO (t. t.),
rooting up.
ul-lapati, to lay claim to, to assert.
ul-lumpati, to lift up.
ul-loketi, to look up.
ussaho, exertion.
E.
ekaggo (adj.), calm, tranquil.
eha-cco (adj.), one, a certain.
eka-m-antam (adv.), on one side.
EKO (num.), one ; alone.
EKO (adj.), single, solitary.
EKODIBHAVO (t. t.), unity, per-
haps 'predominance.'
etarahi (adv.), now.
etadiso, such like.
ETI, to go, to enter (with ace).
EVA and EVAM (adv.), thus.
ESANA (f.), wish, desire.
ESl (adj.), seeking, desiring.
ehi-passiko (adj.), inviting (epithet
of the dhamma).
O.
o-kaso, room, place.
O'kkanti ({.), descent.
OGHO, flood, torrent.
opanayiko, leading to perfection
(epithet of the dhamma).
otthdvo (adj.), steady.
ODATO, white, pure.
opako, without result.
o-pildpeti, to let float.
o-bhasati, to shine.
o-bhaso, light.
o-hito (p. p. p.), put down, deposited.
K.
KAIVfSO, metal, bronze.
KANKHATI, to doubt.
KACCHURO, scab.
KATHINAM (t. t.), a robe made
for a Buddhist priest in a single
day, out of the rough material.
K AT HI NO (adj.), hard, solid.
KANDU (f.), itch.
KANNO, ear.
KANHO (adj.), black, sinful.
katapuhnatd, meritorlousness.
KATAMO (pron.), what ? which ?
KATHAM (adv.), how.
KATHA (f.), discourse.
kad-ariyo, a bad man.
KANTO (a(^j.), loved, agreeable.
KAPPASIKAM, cotton.
KAPPIYO (adj.), fit, right, proper;
kappiyabhumi, a suitable site.
KAPPETI (cans.), to enter upon, to
arrange.
KAPPO, time; rule; ordinance; all,
the whole ; kevalakappo, whole.
KAMPATI, to shake.
KAMBAKAM, woollen garment.
KAMMAM, doing, action.
kammanta (f.), calling.
kammanto, conduct ; occupntiuu,
work,
kamma-vipako, result of actions.
kamyata ({.), desire.
KARAI^AM, making.
KARlSAM, excrement.
100
GLOSSARY.
KARUIVA. (f.), compassion.
KAROTI, to make (see Grammar);
mantuikaroti, to piiy attention ;
kalaiikaroti, to die ; anjalim
karoti, to salute respectfully.
KALEBARAM, a corpse.
K AS ATI, to plough.
kasi, ploughing.
kassako, a ploughman.
KAMO, wish, desire ; lust, pasgion.
KAYO, body.
kayiko (adj.), bodily, physical.
KARl (adj.), doing, acting.
KARO, making, constituent part.
kalakiriyd (f.), death.
KALO, time; kalena, in due time;
bhattakalo, meal-time.
kdlam mahhati, he deems it right.
KASO, a cough.
-KIM (adv.), why, pray? what.
khhsu, what.
kihci[d), anything, whatsoever.
KINCIKKHAM, a trifle.
KITTAYATI, kitteti, to proclaim.
KITTI (f.), fame.
KIPILLIKO, an ant. [tion.
KILAMATHO, fatigue, mortifica-
KILASO, scab, dry leprosy.
KiRAM, meat.
KlVA (adv.), how?
KUKUCCAM, misconduct.
KUKUTTHAKO, Phasiunus gal-
lus, a bird.
KUCCHI(f.), belly.
KU^JARO, elephant.
KUTTHAM, leprosy.
KUNTHO, an ant.
KUMARO, hoy.
kumari ((.), a girl.
KULAIVI, flock, herd ; family.
kulaputto, son of noble family ;
high caste.
KULlRAKO, a crab.
KUSALO (adj.) (t. t.), skilful.
KCLAM, rag. [complished.
KEVALl (m.) (t.t.), one who is ac-
KEVALO (adj.), whole, entire.
KESO, hair.
KO (inter, pron.), who ? which ?
what ? (see Grammar).
koci, whosoever.
KOST.A, heron.
KODHO, anger.
kovido, knowing, acquainted with.
KOPlNAM, pudenda.
KOSEYYAM, silken stuff.
KH.
KHANO, moment (brief measure
of time).
khandiccam, state of being broken.
KHATTIYO, warrior.
KHANTi (f.), patience.
KHANDO, the shoulders ; 1. 1. ele-
ment of being.
KHAMATI, to endure ; to forgive ;
to be approved.
KHAYO, extinction, vanishing.
KHARO, solid; harsh.
KHASA (f.), scab.
KHIPATI, to throw.
KHIYATI, to decrease, to waste
away; to murmur; p. p. p. khijio.
KHILO, a pin, a stake.
KHUDDO (adj.), mean.
KHURO, hoof of a horse or ox.
KHELO, saliva, phlegm.
KHETTAld, land, district.
GLOSSARY.
161
KHEMAI!^, safety, well-being ;
yogakkhemam, nibbana.
KHEMO, fern. KHEMi (adj.),
secure.
KHO (inter).), indeed.
KHOMAM, linen.
G.
GACCHATI, to go (see Grammar).
GANG, multitude.
GANDO, goitre.
GANH ATI, to take, to seize ; p. p. p.
gahito.
GANTHETI, to tie, to bind.
GANDO, smell, odour.
GABBHARO, a cleft.
GABBHO, womb, belly.
GAMBHiRO (adj.), deep.
gammo, accessible.
GARAHA (f.), blame.
GARU (m.), parent, teacher.
garu-karo, respect.
GAHATTHO, a householder.
GATHA, stanza.
gamini (adj.), leading.
GAMO, village.
^ara^Ao (adj.), blameable; contemp-
tible.
GARAVO, reverence.
gavi, cow.
GIMHO, heat.
GIMHANAM, hot season.
GIRA, voice, speech.
GIRI, mountain.
GILATI, to devour.
GILANO (adj.), sick, iU.
OITAM, singing, a song.
GUTTI (f.), guarding.
GUMBO, a bush, a thicket.
GUHA (f.), rock-cave.
GEDHO, greediness.
GO (m. f.), ox, cow (see Grammar).
GOTTAlVr, famUy, lineage.
GOPATI, to protect, to guard;
p. p. p. gutto, cp. kayagutto.
GH.
GHARAIVI, house.
gharamen, leading the life of a
householder.
GHARO, house.
GHANAM, nose.
GHAYATI, to smeU.
C.
CA (conj.), and, also.
CAKKHU (n.), eye, insight.
cakkhumd (adj.), having eyes,
having insight,
CANDO (adj.), wrathful, passionate.
catuttho, fourth ; catutthath, for
the fourth time.
catud-disam, the four cardinal
points.
catup-pado, having four feet.
CATTARO (num.), four; cataio
((.), cattari (n.).
CARANAM, good conduct.
CARATI, to go.
CAVATI, to disappear ; p. p. p.
cuto.
CAVANAlfl, disappearance, death.
CAGO, liberality, self-sacrifice ;
abandoning.
CICCITAYATI, to splash.
CITTAM, mind.
cittako (adj.), mindful.
CINTETI, to think.
11
162
6I.088ART.
CiVARAM, robe.
CUTI, disappearing, death.
cetasiko (adj.), mental.
CETO, mind.
ceto-vimutti, emancipation of mind.
CORO, a tliief.
CH.
CHA (num.), six.
CHATTHO, sixtli.
CHAPPETI, to tlirow away, to
renounce.
CHANDO, wish, resolve, intention.
CHAMBHATI, to be alarmed.
CHAMBHITATTAM, trembling.
CHAYA (f.), shadow.
CHINDATI, to cut off.
J.
Janapado, a country.
janeti (caus. jay at i), to bring forth,
to produce.
JANETTI, a mother.
JANO, man, person, being.
JARA (f.), old age, decay.
JARO, fever.
JALATI, to bum.
JAHATf, to leave behind.
JATARCPAM, gold.
JATI (f.), birth.
JATU (adv.), verily.
Jato (p. p. p.), lomahatthajato, the
hair standing on end terrified.
JANATI, to know. [duced.
JAY ATI, to be bom, to be pro-
JALA (f.), flame.
JIGUCCHATI, to dislike.
JIOHACCHA (f.), hunger.
jinnako (adj.), old.
JIVHA (f.), tongue.
JlRANAM, growing old; decay.
JlRATI, to g-r()w ohl.
JiVIKA (f.), livelihood, life.
JIVITAM, life.
JIVI (adj.), living.
JUTI (f.), splendour ; jutima, po8-
sesf^ed with splendour.
JO, at last part of a compound
' arising from.'
JH.
JHANAM (t. t.), meditation.
SATTI (f.), announcement, declara-
tion, formula.
^ANAM, knowledge.
]SATAK0, a relative.
5^ATI, kinsman.
NAYO, right method.
p.
DAMSO, a gad-fly.
PASATf, to bite ; p. p. p. dattho.
PAHO, burning.
TH.
XHANl (adj.), having breasts ;
timbarutthani, having breasts
like a tinduka fruit.
THANAM, standing.
thanaso (adv.), causally, necessarily.
THITI (f.), durability; life.
T.
TAOGHA (adv.), verily.
TACO, skin.
TANDULO, rice ready for boiling.
GLOSSARY.
163
TANHA (f.), lust, desire; maha-
tanho, Imviiig great desire.
tatiyo, third ; tatlyam, for the
third time.
TATRA (adv.), tliere.
TAPASSi (m.), hermit.
TAPO, penance.
TAMO, darkness. [tint.
TAYO (num.), three; f. tisso, n.
TARATI, to cross, to overcome.
TALAM, surface, level.
TASO (adj.), moving, moveable.
TALO, fan-palm. [mar).
TITTHATI, to stand (see Grana-
TINAM, grass.
TIDDANAM, destroyer.
TIMBARU (m.). the tinduka-tree.
tiracchdnagato, a beast, an animal.
TIRIYAM (adv.), across.
TU (particle), now, but.
TUNDlKiRO, cotton-tree.
TUNHI (adv.), silently.
TUVATAM (adv.), quickly.
TEJO (n.), splendour.
TELAM, rape-oil.
TVAM (pron.), you, thou (see
Grammar).
TH.
THADDHO (adj.), firm, stubborn,
proud ; jati-tthaddho, proud of his
birth.
THANAYATI, to thunder.
THAVARO (adj.), stationary, firm.
THERO, a priest, an elder.
THOLO (adj.), big.
D.
DAKKHATA (f.), »kUL
DAKKHINO (adj.), right-handed;
southern.
DAKKHINEYYO (adj.), worthy of
oflfe rings.
DALHO (adj.), firm.
DANDO, a staff.
DADATI, to give (see Grammar,
p. 56).
DADDALLATI, to blaze, to shine
brilliantly.
DADDU (f.), leprosy.
DANTO, a tooth.
DAMO, self-command.
dammo (adj.), to be tamed.
DAYA (f.), mercy, pity.
DARl (f.), a cave.
DAVO, amusement.
DASA (num.), ten.
DASSANAM, insight, discernment.
DANAM, alms.
DANI (adv.), now.
DAYADO, kinsman.
DAYO, a forest.
DARO, DARA, wife. ,
DASO, slave.
di-jo, twice born.
ditthapado, one who has seen the
state {i.e. Nibbana).
DITTHA (interjection).
DITTHI (f.), view, beUef.
DIBBO (adj.), celestial.
DIVASO, a day.
divasd (adv.), during the day.
diva ca ratio, day and night.
DISA (f.), a point of the compass.
disaati (pass, of passati), to be seen.
DiGHO (adj.), long.
DUKKHAM (t.t.), pain.
DUG-GATI, hell, bad place.
un
GL088ART.
dutiyo, second ; dutiyath (adv.), fur
the second time.
duvijano, difficult to understand.
DUSSAM, cloth.
DOBHATI, to illtreat.
durato (adv.), from far.
DORE (adv.), far.
deva-ko, god.
devatd, a deva.
devaputto, a god.
DEVO, a god.
DESAYATI, deseti, to preach.
DESO, country.
DESSi, hater.
DEHO, body.
domanasaam, dejection, gloom.
DOSO (Skr. dvesha), anger, hatred.
DOSO (Skr. dosha), defect, blemish.
DVAYO, of two sorts, divers.
dvi-padako, having two feet.
DVE (num.), two.
dvedha (adv.), in two parts.
DH.
DHAJAGGAM, flag.
DHANAM, property, wealth.
DHAMMO (t. t.), law, condition ;
ditthadhammo, the visible condi-
tion, the present world.
uttarimanuasa-dhavimo, superhu-
man condition.
dhamma-vicayo, religious research.
DHAMMO (adj.), religious ; fem.
dhammi.
DHATU (n. and f.), substance;
principle.
DHARANAM, bearing in mind.
dharayati (cans.), to bear in mind.
DHITI (f.)f wisdom, energy.
DHiRO (adj.), wise.
DHUTTO, fraudulent.
DHUNATI, to shake.
dhurava, taking the yoke.
DHURO, ayoke.
DHORAYHO, beast of burden.
N.
NA (neg.), not.
NAKHO, nail of the finger.
NAGARAM, a town.
NANGALAM, plough.
NACCAM, dancing.
NANDI (f.), joy.
NAMATI, to bow down.
NAM ASS ATI, to honour.
NAMO (indecl.), honour, reverence
(with the dative).
NARASA BHO, chief of men.
NARO, man.
NALINi (f.), a pond.
NAVA (num.), nine.
NAVANlTAM, cream.
tiavamo, ninth.
NAVO (adj.), new.
NAHATAKO (t. t.), one in whom
spiritual instruction is complete ;
who is cleansed, pure.
NAHARU, tendon, muscle.
NAGO, a serpent ; susunago, a
young serpent.
NALIKERO, coconut-tree.
NANATTAM, diversity.
NANA (adv.), various, different ;
away from.
ndna-pjtakdro, of various sorts.
NAMA (adv.), by name ; indeed.
NAMAM, name ; namanpam (t. t.).
ndmaso (adv.), with name.
GLOSSARY.
1«
NIKAYO, assembly, multitude ;
sa^^an/Arayo, assemblage of beings.
NI (prep., only iu composition),
downwards.
NI and NIR (prep., only in com-
position), outward.
ni-kubbati, to deceive.
nik-kanii (adj.), free from desire.
nik-kttjjito, what has been over-
thrown.
nik-k/iamati, to go out.
nik-khamati, to devote.
ni-kkhepo, putting down ; inter-
ment.
NIGAMO, a town.
ni-gdhako, an oppressor, enemy.
NIGRODHO, banyan-tree.
NICCO (adj.), perpetual.
ni-jigimsati, to covet.
ni-pako (adj.), prudent.
ni-patati, to fall down.
NIBBATI (t.t.), to be extinguished,
to go out.
NIBBANAM (t. t.), the summum
bonum of the Buddhists.
NIBBUTI, tranquillity (Nibbdna).
nibbuto (t. t.), free from care, or
having attained Nibbana.
nibhdsi (adj.), shining.
NIMANTANAM (t. t.), invitation.
NIMITTAM, sign, mark; subject
of thought.
nit/ydniko, leading to salvation.
NIYO (adj.), own.
NIRAYO, hell.
nt-rt<i//}a/t (pass.), to cease, to perish.
NIRODHO (t.t.), cessation.
NIVATO, humility. [off.
ni-vareti (cans.), to keep off, to ward
ni-vdsi (adj.), dwelling.
ni-vdseti, to dress.
ni-vesanam, house, abode.
ni-vutOy obstructed.
ni-sdmeti, to attend, listen to.
ni-sidati, to sit down.
NISSAYO (t. t.), resource ; cattdro
nissaya,
nis-saranarh, outcome, result.
nis-sdya (ger.), dependent upon.
nihtno (adj.), low, vile.
NICO (adj.), low, mean, base.
nt-yati, to go out.
NONA (adv.), surely.
nekkhammam, giving up the world.
ne-katiko, fallacious.
NETTAM, eye.
P.
PA (prep.), frequently in composi-
tion, before, onward.
PAMSU (n.), dust, dirt.
pa-kdsati, to be visible, to manifest.
PAKKHANDIKA (f.), diarrheea.
PAKKHI (adj.), possessed with
wing«.
PARK H IK AM (t. t.), a feast held
on the eighth day of the month.
pa-kkhipati, to throw.
pa-gumbo, thicket.
pa-gganhdti, to hold out, to bring
forth, to get ready.
PACATI, to cook.
pa-cdro, attendant.
pacca-kdlo, present time.
PACCAITAM (adv.), singly.
paccantko (adj.), adverse, hostile,
opposite.
PACCAYO, a requisite.
160
OLOSSART.
pacca-vekkhati, to look at.
pacc-ud-a-vattati, to retreat.
pacceko, each one, single, several.
PACCHIMO (adj.), l.indermost,
last ; pacchimd disd, the west.
pa-jahati, to abandon.
PA J A (f.), progeny, race.
pa-jjalat't, to burn, to blaze.
pa-janati, to know, to understand ;
caus. pahndpeti, to make known ;
p. p. p. panhatto.
pajdyati, to multiply.
pajjalati, to shine.
pajjoto, light, lustre, lamp ; tela-
pajjoto, an oil-lamp.
PANCA (num.), five.
pahcamo, the fifth,
PANNA, wisdom, intellect, under-
standing.
PANHAM (panham), question.
PATI and PATI, towards, back,
in return; in composition before
vowels, pace.
pati-kkatnati, to step backwards.
pati-kkamo, retreating.
pati-ggahanam, acceptance, receiv-
ing (to ganhdti).
pati-ghdto, repulsion, warding ofi^.
PATI-GHO, anger.
puti-cchddanarh, concealment.
pati-cchddi, covering.
pati-cchddeti, to conceal.
pati-jdndti, to know, to personate ;
aor. paccamasi.
pati-nis-sago (t. t.), forsaking.
patipadd ({.), step, way.
pati-pujeti, to honour.
pati-ppa-ssambhati, to be calmed, to
subside, to come to an end.
pati-bujjhati, to awake.
pati-bhdti, to appear, to be evident.
pati-rupo (adj.), suitable, fit.
pati-lab/tati, to obtain, to receive.
pati-ldbho, obtaining ; attainment.
pati-vatteti, to subvert ; with a, not
to be subverted.
pati-vijjhati, to acquire.
pati-sankhdti, to reflect.
pati-sahcikkhati, to consider.
pati-mm-vedi (adj.), experiencing.
pati-sarano, refuge, help,
pati-sundti, to assent ; aor. pace-
assosi, paccassosum.
pati-sevati, to practise, to receive.
PATHAVl (f.), earth.
pa-ndmati, to bend,
pa-ni-dahati, to stretch.
PANIDHI (m.), aspiration (t.t).
pantto (adj.), accomplished, excel-
lent ; as neuter, a term for
nibbdna.
PANDITO, wise man.
PANDU (adj,), yellow.
PANHO and PANHO, question.
PATATI, to fall ; caus. patayatu
pati-rupo, suitable.
pati-sallanam, solitude.
patisalldndrdmo, delighting in soli-
tude.
PA-TITTHA (f.), fixity, resting-
place.
PATTAM, a leaf.
pattakallam, seasonableness, time-
liness.
pattactvaram, bowl and robe.
PATTI (f.), obtaining, acquisition.
PATTO, bowl.
patto, p. p. p, of pdpundti.
GLOSSARY.
167
PATTHAYATI, to wish for, to
desire.
PA DAM, step; nibbana.
pa-dahati, to strive, to exert.
PA-DlPO, lamp.
pa-duttho, wiclied, evil.
PANA (adv.), now, further (the
same as puna).
pa-nudati, to remove, to reject.
PANTHO, a road ; also neuter.
PAPPOTI, see papunati.
PAPPHASAM, lungs.
pa-bba-jati, to go forth.
PA-BBAJITO (t. t.), one who has
given up the world.
PABBAJJA (f.), monastic life.
PABBAJJA (f.) (t.t.), the pabbajja
ordination.
PABBATO, mountain..
pabhamkaro, light-giving.
PABHASO, splendour.
pa-majjati, to delay. [ful.
pamatto, p. p. p. to pamajjati, sloth-
pa-maddt (adj.), crushing, destroy-
ing.
PA-MANAM, measure.
PAMADO, carelessness.
pO'tnuhcati, to release.
pa-mussati, to leave behind.
PAMOCANAM, deliverance.
payirupa-sati, to honour.
pa-yutto, tied.
PARAM (adv.), beyond, after.
paramo, highest.
parabhava, sufiering, loss.
PARABHAVO, decay, loss.
PARI (prep.), around, about, fre-
quently used in composition, where
it appears also as PALI.
PARIKKHARO, apparatus.
pari-kkhino, wasted.
pari-cito (p. p. p.), accumulated.
PARINAMO, change, alteration ;
digestion.
PARITTA (f. and n.), protection.
PARIDEVO, lamentation.
pari-nibbdti (t. t.), to attain Nibbana.
pari-pako, maturity, perfection.
pari-punno, completed.
pari-bhasati, to revile.
pari-mukham (adv.), in front, before.
pariy-addti, to seize, lay hold of.
pariy-dpundti, to learn thoroughly ;
p. p. p. pariydputo.
pari-ydyo, succession, order, way.
pari-yosdnam, termination.
pari-rundhati, to surround ; to lay
siege.
parl-vatto, circle, succession ; modi«
fication.
pari-vanneti, to describe, to praise.
pari-vdreti (cans.), to surround, to
accompany.
PARI-VESANA (f. and n.), dUtri-
bution of food.
PARISA, assembly.
pari-sujjhati (pass.), to be purified.
parisuddho (adj.), pure, clear.
PARISSAYAM, danger.
PARIHARO, attention.
pareto, dead, destroyed.
PARO (adj.), distant, further ;
other.
PARO (adv.), beyond, more than.
PALASO, a leaf.
paligho, an obstacle.
PA-VACANAM, the word of the
Buddha.
168
GLOSSARY.
pa-vatteti (caus.), to set rolling; ;
pavattite dhammacakke, having
founded the kingdom of truth.
PAVANAM, side of a mountain.
pa-vapati, to sow.
pa-vassati, to rain.
pa-vuati, to enter.
palayati, to run away.
pali-gunthati, to envelop, to en-
tangle.
PALLANKO, a couch.
pa-sattho (p. p. p.), praised. [fied.
pa-sanno, p. p. p. to pasidati, satis-
pa-sahati, to use force.
pa-sado, brightness, clearness, glad-
ness.
pa-acuiati, to rule.
PASU, cattle.
PASSATI, to see.
pa-ssaddhi (f.), calming down.
pa-ssambhati, to calm down ; p. p. p.
passaddho.
pa-ssambhayam, calming down.
pa-ssasati, to exhale air.
PASSAVO, urine.
PAHANAM, abandoning.
pa-hitatto, resolute.
pahuto, much, abundant.
pa-hoti, to be able.
pa-honako (adj.), sufficient.
pakimo (adj.), cooked, dressed,
ripfned.
PACANAM, a goad.
PANAM, living being.
panatipati (adj.), taking life.
PANO, breath.
PANAKO, worm, insect.
PANI (m.), hand.
patikankho, to be expected.
PATIPADIKAM (t.t.), food offered
on the day following fuU-muon
day.
PATANAM, causing to fall.
gabbhapatanam, causing miscar-
riage ; abortion.
PATi (f.), a bowl.
PATU (adv.), manifestly.
patu-bhavati, to become visible ;
aor. patur-ahosi.
patu-bhavo, appearance.
pada-talarh, sole of the foot.
PADO, a small silver coin.
pdddraho, worth a pdda.
PADO, foot.
PANAM, drinking.
pdpako (adj.), bad.
pdpiccho, having sinful desires.
PAPUNATI, PAPONOTI, PAPP-
OTI, to attain ; pattabbo, attitin-
able.
PAPO (adj.), evil, bad.
PAYASO, rice-milk.
PARAM, the other shore.
pdrarh Gangdya, across the Ganges.
pdri-sajjo (adj.), belonging to an
assembly ; brahmapdrisajjo, be-
longing to the retinue of Maha-
brabma.
pdri-suddhi, purity, perfection.
PALAYATI, to guard, to preserve.
pdliccam, hoariness, greyness of
hair. [season.
pd-vuasako, belonging to the rainy
PASANO, a stone.
PASADO, house of more than one
storey, tower, palace.
pdhuneyyo (adj.), worthy of being
guests.
GLOSSARY.
109
pitthi-mamsiko (adj.), backbiting.
pilakd (f.), a boil.
PINIJAPATO (t.t.), food received
in the alms bowl.
PINDI (f.), lump, mass.
PINDO, lump, ball ; food ; alms.
PITA (m.), father (see Grammar).
PITTAM, bile.
PI-NASO, cold in the head.
PI PAS A, thirst.
PIPPHALI (f.), long pepper.
PIYO (adj.), dear.
PISUNO (adj.), backbiting.
PIHAKAM, spleen.
PiTI, joy, delight.
PUGGALO, individual.
PUCCHATI, to ask, to question.
PUNNO (adj.), good, virtuous.
PUTTO, son. [wide.
PUTHU (adv.), separately, far and
PUNA, see PANA.
punab-bhavo, rebirth.
PUPPHAM, flower.
pubbanho, forenoon.
PUBBO (adj.), former, early.
PUBBO, pus, matter.
PURAM, town.
pura-kkharoti, to put in front.
purato (adv.), in front of.
puratthhno (adj.), eastern.
PURA (adv.), formerly, previously.
PURANO, former.
PURIMO. east.
PURISAKO, minister, attendant.
PURISO, man, a male.
pujako, honouring.
POJA, attention, veneration.
POJETI, to honour.
PCTI, stinking, foal.
PORO, full.
PEKHA (f.), desire ; punnapekho,
looking for good works.
pecca (ger,), having departed.
peseti (caus.), to send.
POKKHARASAKATO, a bird.
POTAKO, youth, cub.
potikd (f.), maiden.
pothujjaniho, belonging to an un-
converted person ; sensual.
ponobbhaviko, connected with re-
birth.
PORANO and PORANAKO, old.
POSO, man.
PLAVATI, or piluvati, to float;
caus. pildpeti.
PH.
PHARATI, to flash, to shine forth.
PHARUSO, harsh, unkind.
PHALAM, fruit.
PHALATI, to split asunder, to
break open.
PHANITAM, sugar.
phdleti (caus.), to split, to cleave.
PHALO, ploughshare.
PHASU (adj.), comfortable.
phdsu-vihdro, comfort, ease.
PHUTO, thrilled, pervaded.
PHUSATI, to touch, to reach;
p. p. p. phuttho.
PHUSSITO (adj.), flowering, blos-
soming.
PHOTTABBAM (t. t.), touch.
B.
BANDHATI, to bind.
BANDHAXAM, binding; bonds,
fetter.
170
OL088ART.
BANDHU (m.), kinsmnn.
BALI (in.), religious offering.
BALIVADDO, an ox.
BAHU(adj.), many.
bahu-ppado, having many feet.
BALHO (adj.), hard, severe, as first
part of a compound ' very.'
BALO (adj.), young, foolish.
BAHIRO (adj.), external.
BiJAM, g«rm, seed.
BUDDHO, an epithet of Gotama,
and used as a designation of
Gotama ' the Enlightened.'
BOJJHANGO (t. t.), constituents
of wisdom.
BODHI (f.), wisdom.
BRAVlTI, BROTI, to say, to tell.
BRAHMAM, practice of devotion.
BRAHMACARIYAM (t. t., also
fem.), a religious life ; the duties
of a religious life.
BRAHMANO, a brahmin.
by-anti-karoti, to abolish, to re-
move.
BY AS AN AM, misfortune, unhap>
piness.
byd-karoti, to answer.
BYADHI (m.), illness.
BYAPADO, wish to injure.
BYAROSANA (f.), anger.
BH.
BHAKKHO (adj.), eating.
BHAOANDALA (f.), fistula.
BH AGAVA (adj.), worshipful,
venerable ; an epithet of the
Buddha.
BHAGINl (f.), sister.
BHANGAJVI, hempen cloth.
BHAJATf, to serve, to honour; to
cultivate.
BHANATI, to shine.
BHANATI, to speak; pass, bha-
nnati.
BHATTAM, food; uddeta (t.t.),
food given on special occasions ;
aaldka° (t. t), ticket food.
BHADANTO, term for addressing
a Buddhist monk.
BHADDO, BHADRO (adj.), good.
BHAYAM, fear.
BHARATI, to bear, to support.
BH AVAIVT, lord, sir (see Grammar).
BHAVATI, to be, to exist.
BHAVANAM, being, existence ;
realm.
BHAVO, corporeal existence, birth.
BHAGO, portion, part, share.
BHATARO, brother.
BHATA (m.), brother.
BHARO, burden.
bhdveti (cans, to bhavati), to in-
crease, to cause to exist.
BHAVO, property.
BHASATI, to tell.
BHIKKHU, title of a Buddhist
monk.
BHIKH;^N! (f), female mendicant.
BHISMO (adj.), terrible.
BHiYO, BHIYYO (adj.), more.
BHiRU (adj.), timid.
BHUJISSO, a free man; a freed
slave.
BHUNJATI, to enjoy ; to eat.
bhummo (adj.), terrestrial.
BHUSAM (adv.), much, exceed-
ingly.
bhutakalo, time to speak the truth.
GLOSSARY.
171
bhutapubbo (adj.), that has b«en
before.
BH CTO, spirit, being.
BHCMI(f.), the earth.
BHEDO, parting.
BHERAVO (adj.), frightful.
BHESAJJAM, medicine.
BHO, sir, master (see Grammar).
BHOGO, wealth ; appa-bhogo,
having little property.
BHOJANAM, food.
M.
MAMS AM, flesh.
MAKASO, a gnat, mosquito.
MAKKHI (adj.), concealing ; pa-
pamakkhi, hypocritical.
MAGGO, path.
MANKU, troubled, restless.
MANGALO (adj.), happy.
MACCU (m.), death.
MAJJAM, strong drink.
majjhimo (adj.), middle.
MAJJHO, middle.
MANNATI, to think.
MAXDANAM, adornment.
MANDALI (adj.), having a disc.
MATTA (f.), measure ; quality.
MATTHAKAM, head.
MATTHALUNGAM, brain.
MADO, enjoyment.
MADHU(n.), honey.
madfiumeho, diabetes.
MANAPO, pleasing, pleasant,
charming.
MANUSSO, man, human being.
MANO, mind (also neuter).
tnanoramo (adj.), pleasant, delight*
ful.
MANTETI, to consult, to advise.
MANTO, hymn ; the Vedns.
MANDIVO, slowness, stupidity.
mamayito, concerning oneself ; own.
MAYURO, MORO, peacock.
MARANAM, dying, death.
mahab-balo, having great strength.
MAHA, great (see Grammar).
mahd-matto, king's minister, g^at
noble.
maha-raja, king, great king.
MA, negation.
MALUTO, wind.
MANAVAKO (adj.), young; a
young man.
MATA (f.), mother (see Grammar).
MANASO, lust.
MANUSO, MANUSi (f.) (adj.),
human.
MANO, pride, arrogance.
MAYA (f.), illusion, deceit; mayavi,
deceitful.
MARISO, venerable person ; term
of address.
MALA (f.), a garland.
MASO, month.
MIGO, antelope, deer.
MICCHA (adv.), falsely, wrongly.
miccha-caro, wrong conduct.
MITTO, friend.
MIDDHAM, sleep ; vigatamiddho,
awake.
MINATI, to measure ; p. f. p.
tnetabbo.
MUKHAM, mouth, face; means,
cause.
MURHO, face.
MUCCHA (f.), faintnesB.
MUNCATI, to release.
172
GLOSSARY.
MUNDAKO, shaveling, term of
reproach.
MUTTAM, urine ; putimuttam,
urine of cattle.
MUTTr(f.), release.
MUDU (adj.), soft.
MUDDHA (m.), head.
MUDHA (adv.), gratis, for nothing.
MUSA (adv.), wrongly.
musa-vddo, lying, falsehood.
MUHUTTO, second, hrief measure
of time.
MOLHO, stupid.
MCLAM, root.
MCSTKO, a fly.
MEG HO, cloud, storm, rain.
METHUNO (adj.), relating to
sexual intercourse.
ME DO, fat, blubber.
MERAYAM, intoxicating liquor.
MODATI, to rejoice.
MORO, see MAYURO.
MOHO, ignorance.
Y.
YAKANAJfr, the liver.
YAKKHO, a superhuman being, a
yaksha.
YATI, to restrain ; p. p. p. yato.
YATO (adv.), since.
YATTHA (adv.), the same as
^ yatra,'' inasmuch.
YATHA (adv.), as.
yathabhutam (adv.), according to
the reality.
YADA (adv.), when, whenever.
YASO, fame, renown.
ycusassivd, surrounded by eminent
men.
yasassl (adj.), famous.
YACATI, to ask, to beg, to entreat.
YATI, to go.
YATRA (f.), livelihood.
YANAM, going, preceding ; car-
riage, car.
ydni-fcato, used as a vehicle.
YAPANAM, maintenance.
YAPANATI, to live.
YAVA (adv.), as long ; ydva ki-
vanca, and as long as ; in con-
junction with eva, ydvad eva, so
long as.
Y'UGAM, pair ; generation.
YUGO (also neuter), yoke. [to.
Y UN J ATI, to turn one's attention
YEBHUYYO (adj.), abundant ;
yebhuyyena, in great numbers.
YO (pron.), who (see Grammar).
YOGAKKHEMO, security ; t. t.
Nibbana.
YOTTAM, tie.
YONI (f.), womb ; source, origin.
YONISO, really.
YOBBANAM, youth.
R.
RAKKHATI, to protect.
RAKKHA (f.), protection.
RAJATAM, silver.
RAJJAM, kingdom.
RATTI (f.), night.
ratti-n-divo, day and night.
RABHASO (adj.), contemptuous,
fierce.
RAMATI, to enjoy oneself, to de-
light in ; rato, delighting.
RASO, sap, juice ; sweet thing ;
taste.
GLOSSART.
178
rtusako (adj.), short.
RASSO (adj.), short.
RAHADO, a deep pool, a lake.
RAHO, solitude.
RAGO, evil desire, greed, attach-
ment, lust.
rajadhant, royal city.
rajabhato, king's soldier.
RAJA (m.), king, see Grammar.
RAMO, joy, delight.
RITTO [rishta], injured.
RUDDO (adj.), cruel.
RUKKHO, a tree.
ROPAM (t. t.), form, figure.
ROGO, illness.
ROCETI (caus.), to approve.
ROSAKO (adj.), wTathful.
LABHATI, to take ; p. p. p.
laddho.
LAYO, instant (brief measure of
time).
LASIKA (f.), the fluid which lubri-
cates the joints.
LABHA (adv. dat.), for the ad-
vantage of.
LUDDO (adj.), cruel.
LOKO, world.
loka-jettho, chief of the world.
LOKA-DHAMMO (t. t.), things of
the world, worldly condition.
loka-dhatu, world-system.
loka-vidu, knowing the world (epi-
thet of the Buddha).
LOMAM, hair of the body.
LOMAHAIMSO, horripilation.
LOHITAM, blood.
LOHITO (adj.), red.
V.
VAKKAM, kidney.
vaggiyo (adj.), belonging to a group.
VAGGU (adj.), beautiful.
VACCO, lustre.
VAJATI, to walk.
VAJIRO, Indra's thunderbolt.
VANCANIKO, deceitful.
VANCETI (caus.), to deceive.
VADDHATI, to grow, to increase;
to pour out.
VANNO, appearance, beauty, form ;
caste ; vannava (adj.), having
beauty.
VATA (inter).), indeed ! verily !
VATTATI, to take place.
VATTHAM, cloth ; raiment.
VATTHU (n.), substance.
VATTHU (m.), a site, a building
(Skr. vdstu).
V AD ATI, to declare ; to speak.
VANAM, wood, forest.
VANATHO, desire, lust.
VANIBBAKO, mendicant.
VANDAKO, praising.
VANDATI, to praise.
VAPATI, to sow.
VAPPO, sowing.
varanhu, knowing what is excellent.
varado, giving what is excellent.
varaharo, bringing what is excellent.
VARO (adj.), excellent
VALl (f.), a wrinkle.
valittaro (adj.), ^Tinkled.
VASATI, to dwell.
vatalako, wretched, outcast.
VASA (f.), serum ; marrow of the
flesh.
174
GLOSSARY.
VASALO, outcast.
VASSO, rain ; a year.
VA (conj.), pa — tfd, either . . or.
VACA (f.), word, saying, speech.
VATO, wind.
VADITAM, music.
VADO, speaking, speech.
VAYAMATI, to struggle, to strive.
VAyAMO (t. t.), exertion, endea-
vour.
VASO, dwelling, living, abode.
VAHANAM, carrying; a vehicle;
an animal used in riding.
VI (prep.), used in composition,
asunder, apart from.
vi-kalo, wrong time.
VIGGAHO, body ; manussa°, a
human being. [parsing.
vi-kirano (adj.), squandering, dis-
vi-kkandati, to cry out.
vi-gahati, to obtain.
vi-cakkhano, knowing', wise, dis-
cerning.
vi-carati, to wander.
vi-cdro, investigation.
VICIKICCHITAM, doubt.
VICCHIKO, scorpion.
vi-jand-vato (adj.), understanding.
vi-jeti, vi-jinuti, to conquer.
VIJJATI, to know (see Grammar).
VIJJATI, to be, to exist.
VIJJA (f.), knowledge, wisdom.
VIJJU (f.), lightning.
vijjuko (adj.), lightning.
VIIK^NANAM, consciousness, in-
telligence.
vihndpeti (cans, to vijdndti), to
speak to, to address, to inform.
VINNO (adj.), intelligent.
VI-TAKKO, reflection, thought.
VITACCHIKA (f.), scabies.
VITTAM, property, wealth.
vitthdrati, to declare, to amplify ;
aor. vitthasi. [cation.
vitthdro, detail, extension, amplifi-
VI DO (adj.), knowing, wise.
VI-NAYO, training.
VINA (adv.), without.
vi-ndseti, to waste.
vineti, to remove, to put away.
vinodanam, removal, dispelling.
vinodeti (cans.), to dispel.
VINDATI, to acquire.
vi-pdceti, to be indignant.
VI-PARI-NAMO, change, reverse.
vi-ppa-mutto (p. p. p.), released.
vi-ppa-yogo, absence.
vippa-vasati, to go abroad ; p. p. p.
vippavuttho.
vippavdso, absence ; ticivarenca
avippavdso, not parting with the
three robes.
vi-ppa-sldati, to become calm.
vi'bhajati, to divide, to distinguish.
VIBHAVO, power, prosperity.
VI-BHAVO (t. t.), absence of ex-
istence, formless existence.
vibhdvayatl, to understand.
vibhusanaiii, adornment.
vi-muncati, to release ; p. p. p.
vimutto.
VI.MUTTI(f.), release.
VI-MOKHO, release.
VI-MOCAVAM, releasing.
vi-rajo, free from corruption, pure ;
free from dust.
vi-rajjdti, to be displeased ; p. p. p.
viratto.
GLOSSARY.
176
VIRATI (f.), abstinence.
vi-ramati, to abstnin.
vi-ravati, to cry aloud.
vi-rago, absence of desire.
vira>eti (cans.), to put away.
VIRIYAM, exertion, strength.
vi-ruhati, to go on.
vi-rocati, to lie brilliant.
VILEPANAM, toilet perfume.
vi-varati, to open ; p. p. p. vivato.
VI-VEKO, separation, seclusion ;
discrimination.
viviccati (pass.), to separate oneself.
VISAM, poison.
vi-samo (adj.), uneven.
vi-auddho, (adj.), pure.
VISOKAM, show, spectacle.
VISOCIKA (f.), cholera.
VISESO, distinction.
vi-ssuto (adj.), renowned.
viharati, to dwell.
VI-HARO, living; Buddhist temple.
vi-himsati, to hurt.
VI HI MSA (f.), hurting.
mta-malo, spotless.
VITO (adj.), devoid of; a-vito, not
free from.
vitipatati, to transgress.
vi-ti-sareti, to remind mutually.
ViRO, hero.
ViSATI (num.), twenty.
VUTTHI (f.), rain.
VUTTI (f.), conduct.
vutiiavd, dwelling, residing.
vun-ma (adj.), dwelling.
vupakattho, distant, removed.
VOPASAMO, paciBcation.
VE (interj.), indeed.
VEiyU (m.), a bamboo, a reed.
VEDAGO (t. t.), knowing the law.
VEDANA (f.) (t. t.), perception,
sensation.
VEPULLAM, development.
veyyd-karanam, explanation.
VEYYABADHIKO, sick, ill; to
byabddho. [al>l.).
VERAMANi (f.), abstinence (with
VEROCANAKO, bright.
VELA (f.), time, occasion.
VELO, time.
VEVANNIYAM, change, diversity.
VESi (f.), harlot.
VEHASO, sky.
VOROPETI (cans.), to deprive of.
S.
SA, as first member of a compound
' with.'
SAMYOJANAlff (t. t.), bond, at-
tachment.
samhanti, to strike.
SAKO (adj.), own.
SAKKACCA (adv.), attentively.
SAK-KAYA-DITTHI (t. t.), con-
ceit.
SAK-KAYO, own body or person.
SAK-KARO, hospitality.
aak-karoti, to receive hospitality, to
honour.
SAKKO (adj.), able.
SAKKHf, witness.
SAKHA (m.), companion, friend
(see Grammar).
SAGGO, heaven.
8ANKAPP0 (t.t.), thought, Imagi-
nation, aspiration.
tan-kampati, to quake, to tremble.
san-kuddho, ang^y.
176
GLOSSARY.
SAN-KHARO (t. t.), the elements,
matter.
san-khipati, to shorten, to abridge.
aan-khittena, concisely, l)riefly.
SAN-GAHO, protecting.
SAN-GAM O, conflict, battle.
SAN-GHATi (t.t.), one of the three
robes of a priest.
SANG HO, the Buddliist clerical
community.
SACE (conj.), if.
SACCAM, truth.
tacchikaroti, to see face to face ;
p. p. p. sacchikato.
SACCHIKIRIYA (f.), realization.
sahcicca (adv. ger.), intentionally.
SANJATI (f.), birth.
samamo, refraining.
SANNA (t. t.) (f.), perception.
SATHO (adj.), wicked, crafty.
SATTHI (num.), sixty.
SANHO (adj.), soft ; smooth, gentle.
SATAM (num.), a hundred.
SATI (f.), thoughtfuluess, remem-
brance.
aatima (adj.) of retentive memory;
thoughtful, reflecting.
Sato, p. p. p. garati, recollecting,
mindful.
SAITA (num.), seven.
SATTATI, seventy.
tattavdso, abode of beings.
SATTO, being.
SATTHAM, weapon.
SATTHA (m.), teacher.
tad-attho, one's own advantage.
SADA (adv.), always.
SAD-DAHATI, to believe; p.p.
aaddahdno.
SADDO, sound.
SADDHA, faith.
SADDHIM (adv.), with.
SANTA M (a term for Nibbana).
aan-tatto, scorched.
tan-tarati, to be in haste.
SANTIKE (adv.), in the presence of.
SANTUTTHi (f.), contentment.
SANTUSSAKO, contented.
SANTO, true, good.
san-dasseti (cans.), to show, to teach.
san-ditthiko (adj.), visible.
aan-dhupdyati, to smoke.
8an-nayhati, to bind, to fasten.
san-ni-patati, to assemble.
8annipatiko{a,A].), gathered together.
SAPADANAM (adv.), constantly ;
8ap° pinddya carati, goes his
begging-rounds constantly.
SAPPI, cow's butter.
sap-puriso, good man.
sabbattha (adv.), everywhere.
sabbattho, in every respect.
sabba-dhi, from all sides.
SABBO (pron. adj.), every one, all
(see Grammar).
SABHA (f.), an assembly.
samanako, wretched samana.
SAMANO, an ascetic.
SAM ATTO (adj.), complete.
SAMATHO, tranquillity.
SAMANTO, all, entire ; aamantd,
from every side.
aamanndgato, endowed with.
SAMAYO, time, assembly, agree-
ment ; ekatii samayam, once upon
a time.
aama-vekkhati, to take into con-
sideration.
GLOSSARY.
177
sam-a-gacchati, to assemble.
tam-a-carati, to follow.
sam-a-dapeti (caus. samadiyati), to
instig'ate, to advise.
sam-a-dahati, to put together ; pass.
samadhlyati, to become tran-
quilized.
SAMADHI (f.) (t.t.), meditation.
SAMANO (adj.), equal, same,
similar. [ment.
SAM-A-PATTI (f.) (t.t.), attain-
tam-d-hito, steadfast.
tam-ikkliati, to consider, to reflect.
SAM-ITI (f.), assembly.
sam-uk-kajjisati, to exalt.
sain-ug-ghato, removal.
sam-ut-thanam, rising, originating.
sam-ut'tejeti (caus.), to stir, to excite.
SAM-UD-AYO, rise, origin.
sam ud-eti, to arise ; samudito, ele-
vated.
SAMUDDO, sea.
sam-upabbulho (p. p. p.), set up.
sam-uhanti, to remove.
SAMO, equal.
sam-pa-kampati, to tremble, to
sbake ; a-sam-pa-kampiyo, that
cannot be shaken.
sam-paj'ano, conscious.
sam-patto (p. p. p.), endowed with.
sam-pa-dhupayati, to smoke in
volumes.
sam-panno (p. p. p.), endowed with.
SAM-PA- YOGO, union, presence.
tam-parayiko (adj.), relating to the
future.
SAM-PARAYO, future state, next
world.
tam-pa-vedhati, to tremble.
tam-pa-gadanath, making serene ;
tranqiiilization.
sam-passati, to behold, to discern.
sam-pa-hamseti (cnus.), to gladden,
to delight, to praise.
sampha-ppa-lapo, frivolous talk.
sam-phassa-jo, urising from contact.
SAM-PHASSANAM (t.t.), contact.
sam-phasso, contact.
sam-bahulo (adj.), many.
sam-bddAo, pressure, straits.
SAM-BOJJHAJNfGO (t. t), con-
stitucnt of bodhi.
sambhav-esi (adj.), seeking rebirth.
SAM-BHAVO, production.
sam-mannati, to agree to, to decide ;
to sanction.
SAMMA (indecl.), fully, thoroughly
(used frequently in composition) ;
Sammd sambuddho, the All Wise.
aam-mukht-bhuto, confronted.
sam-mukho (adj.), face to face.
SAM-MUTI (f.), consent, choice,
determination.
sam-muyhatit to be stupefied ; p.p. p.
sammulho.
sani'modati, to agree with ; taddhiih
8°, to exchange friendly greetings.
SAMVARI (f.), night.
sam-vaso, living with.
sam-viggo, excited.
SAYATI, to lie down.
SA YANAM (SENAM), lying, sleep-
ing ; bed, couch.
SARANAM, refuge.
SARABO (f.), a lizard.
sar'ito (p. p. p.), flowing.
SARiRAM, body.
SARO, sound.
12
178
GL08RARY.
SALAKA, a peg ; slip, bit of wood.
tal-lahuko (i><lJ-)> l>g)>t.
SALLiNO, bent together.
SAVANAM, hearing.
SASSU (f.), mother-in-law.
SAHA (in composition), together,
with.
saha-gato, accompanied.
safiasa (adv.), with violence.
SAHASSl, thousand (in composi-
tion).
SAHA (adv.), witli.
aaha-silt (adj.), being fond of society.
SAKACCHA (f.), conversation.
SADHU (adv.), well, good.
SANAM, hempen cloth.
SAMICI (f.), correctness.
SAYANHO, evening.
SAYATI, to taste.
SARATHI, charioteer.
aarantyo (adj.), that which should
be remembered.
sa-ruppo (adj.), 6t, proper.
SALI (m.), rice.
SALIKA (f.), the maynah-bird.
SAVAKO, a disciple.
taveti. {ctius. to sunoti), to impart,
to inform.
SASANAM, order, command.
Buddhas°, the teaching of the
Buddha.
SASO, astlimn.
SIKKHATI, to learn.
SIKHA (f.), peak, summit; aggi-
sikfia, flame of fire.
SIKKH APADA.\I (t. t.), sentence of
moral training.
SINGHANIKA, mucus of the nose.
SITO (Skr. gritd), resting upon.
8IPPAM, skill.
SIRIMSAPO, a snake.
tiri-tna (adj.), having magnificence,
glory.
SFRl (f.), fortune, prosperity.
SI LA (f.), a rock.
SITjOKO, a stanza, a qloka.
SIVIKA(f.), a palanquin.
SI VO (adj.), auspicious, blest, happy.
STMA (f.). boundary, limit.
SiTAM, coldness.
SiTO (adj.), col<l, cool.
SiLAM (t, t.), nature, character ;
moral character, piety.
SiLABBATAM (t.t.), aflfection of
good rites.
sila-va (adj.), virtuous.
SILI (adj.), having a habit, dispo-
sition ; niddd-tP, drowsy, slothful.
SiSAM, head.
Si HO, lion.
SU (in composition), well, good.
SUKO, a parrot.
SUKHO (adj.), blest, happy.
SUKHO, bliss.
SU-GATO, happy (epithet of the
Buddha).
su-gandho, of good smell.
su-ggahito (adj.), grasped.
8UCI (f.), purity.
8u-cinno, well done.
SUNNAGARAI^r, solitude, place
void of houses.
SUNOTI, SUNATI, to hear (see
Grammar).
8uto (p. p. p.), heard, renowned.
gudath (part.), sma + idam.
tu-dul-lahho, very difficult to obtain.
8U-DHAMMAT0 (t.t), perfection.
GLOSSARY.
179
8UDDH0 (adj.), clean.
su-pati-panno, well-conducted.
SUPATI, to sleep.
SUPINAM, sleep. [joined.
su-ppa-yutto (p. p. p.), thoroughly
su-bhavo, easily supported.
su-mano, satisfied.
su-mapito (adj.), well-built.
SURA (f.), intoxicating liquor.
SURIYO, the sun.
su-vi-jdno, easily known.
SUSU, a boy.
SUSSOSA (f.), desire to hear.
SCJU (adj.), conscientious.
SOLO, rheumatism.
SEMHAM, phlegm.
SEKHO (t. t.), one who is under
training.
SETTHO (adj.), best, foremost.
SEDO, sweat, moisture.
SENA (f.), army.
SEN-ASANAM, [sleeping and sit-
ting] dwelling.
seyyako (adj.), lying, sleeping.
SEVATI, to serve, to follow.
SEVANA (f.), addicted to, devotion
to ; A-sevana, not addicted to.
SO (pron.), this (see Grammar).
SO (adj.), own ; sarh (adv.) by
oneself.
SOKO, sorrow, grief.
SOCATI, to grieve.
socanatfam, mourning.
SOCANAM, mourning.
SONDO (adj.), addicted to drink ;
fem. SOXpI.
SOTAJ*, ear. [tlon.
SOTAPATTI (f.), (t. t.), sanctifica-
SOTTHANAM, blessing.
SOBHATI, to shine.
SORACCAM, tenderness.
sovacassatd (f.), pleasant speech.
SOSO, consumption.
8v-akkhdto, well told.
H.
HA (interj.), truly.
HATTHI (m.), elephant.
HATTHO (p. p. p.), bristling.
HATTHO, hand.
H ADA YAM, heart.
HANTI, to kill.
HAND A (interj.), come onl
HAM MI YAM, house surrounded
by walls.
HARATI, to carry away.
HARI (adj.), green.
HARITAM, grass.
haritattam, greenness, yellowness.
HAVE (interj.), truly.
HI (part.), for, because ; certainly,
indeed ; also.
HIMSATI, to hurt.
HIRANNAM, gold.
HIRi, modesty, shame.
HITO (p. p. p. and adj.), beneficial.
hino (p. p. p.), wasted, decayed.
HETHETI, to injure.
HETTHIMO (adj.), lower, lowest.
HETU (adv.), on account of, by
means of.
HOT!, to be ; see bhavati.
HERTFORD :
FRINTZD BY eTIFHEN ATIBTIS AND SONS.
SINHALESE ALPHABET.
Vowels
^ a ^ a. (^ i if I (^y u. (^ u Se €d o.
Vowel Symbols.
0. ^. ^ . J. J. ^. (B^ 0.
t^ ka. Z^^ha £)ki fc fi SJ^Jku. ty\Jkn6^ke. 6t3nko.
^khu. ^ khu.
Nasal Vowels.
The symhol is <? . <Y>6» ant. It is also used
for any nasal hefore anc^her Consonant
Consonants.
^ ka. 'o) . kha 00 ga. t50 gha €D ^a
O ca d^cka ^j^ f^jha Q5^ ^
0 ta (^ tha €d du tb d^a S^ 'na
tX) du (3 tha C^ da Zd dha ^^ Tia
^ pa e3 pha ^ Va &S Vha ^ ma
60 ya 6 ra /^ la* -^t~) 'i'^
t^ sa 60 %a f^ la.
Consonant Symbols
r. ^ hra
Tlrama ' ^ k. ^ nv.
Compound Consonants.
QCs 'nj^aW^ ^a (XS'^ja ® nda (Lb tlha
(to ddha tD cca €U) 'bha c^ 'nilMZ.
^U) Tikha. e^^ jjha r^ tlha S^ 'ndha
un
Burmese Alphabet.
Vowels. __
SYMBOLS.} L) lb
CJOka,. COokcij c8ki. cSH. coku. en ku. crcoke.cxrDokc.
O/ ga GO I go.
Nns/iL Vowels. The syrnhil for the nasal votv-ds is °
5^ am . 11 is also vised tb express any nasal htforc
another consonant.
Simple Consonants.
CIO ka O kha
O.S) ca
C ta
OO ta
U pa
(JO ya
OO Sa
DO cha
G tha
OO ^ha
(J -pha
O.OJ ra
OO ha
Consonant Symbols.
C iia. ^
OJ ya, J
1 ^« C
ij-a
a
J
Virdma
O ga
O ja
3 <ia
CO la
OCT nka
IX) gha
qj jha
^ dha
O dha
OO hha
O V-a
C na
OD na
COO 7ia
t> -na
Q ma
O -V-a
OO ha
O^ yya ^ Uhya
(m kra /3 ^ra
GO ft^a
on nha O rtiha
ob^t.
Compound Consonants.
(^ ryda eg ?i/ia g ddka
ddha
O) ppa O ^/^^ta
OOO Ssa.
h
OO OQ s^n a
O ^
stn
XAMBODIAN ALPHABET.
Vowels. ,
%^a. %^cL. /Ti. ^ i. Q^vb. QjjM 0\e. €\ o.
^ i^ ^ ^Q^ 0,^
Vowel Symbols.
o <i>
PTka. e^ka ^ki ^ki. eTku.?^ku.C^ke.C^h
Nasal Vowels. The symhol ^ is added to the simple
irow-el: %^ arn . It is also used as a nasal hefcrt
another consonant .
Simple Consonants
^ ka O kha f? ga Xl^ gka O -iia
i3 ca ^ cha ^ ja flSJ jha TQ ^a
i^ ta ^ Iha n da (T^ dha ti^ na
^ ta ^ thu ^ da t(S dha ^ Tva
tS pa W pha G^ Int '^ Vha %^ ma
i^X^tfcL ^ ra SkS la ^ v-a
^ sa U^ha "^ la
Compound Consonants
fSymtcl for rcL j )0 l^ra \^^ ndra
»» «» gemintdtcn j ^Vssa SS^ ppa
**P§ klika iz^^ ncfka ^ ccka C^ nca ^)0 ttka
(AO nda f^ ttha O ti^a ^^ ddha ^ dvu
JV nna %^ mVa.
k
V
C
CO
o
o
t ~2
o
tf> i— J
o
t
At
o
o
14
O
A -J
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO
LIBRARif
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. " Rrf. Index File."
Made by LIBRARY BUREAU
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11